2024 25 BCSS Handbook : simplebooklet.com

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 5TABLE OF CONTENTS100.0 GENERALGREETINGS .................................................................................................18HISTORY ....................................................................................................19ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE ............................................................................20ABOUT BCSS ................................................................................................21DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................232024-2025 BC SCHOOL SPORTS BOARD OF DIRECTORS ...................................................242024-2025 LEGISLATIVE ASSEMBLY REPRESENTATIVES ....................................................262024-2025 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP DATES ...........................................................282024-2025 IMPORTANT DATES ..............................................................................29210.0 CONSTITUTION ..................................................................................31220.0 BYLAWS1. INTERPRETATION ....................................................................................322. MEMBERSHIP .......................................................................................333. MEMBERSHIP RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS ..........................................................364. MEETINGS OF MEMBERS ............................................................................375. PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS ............................................................386. VOTING BY MEMBERS ...............................................................................397. DIRECTORS ..........................................................................................398. ELECTION OF DIRECTORS-AT-LARGE ...............................................................419. OFFICERS ............................................................................................4110. POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE BOARD ..................................................4311. PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD .....................................................................4412 . DECISION MAKING AT BOARD MEETINGS ...........................................................4513. INDEMNIFICATION ...................................................................................4514. COMMITTEES ........................................................................................4515. ZONES ...............................................................................................4616. EXECUTION OF INSTRUMENTS ......................................................................4717. FINANCIAL MATTERS AND REPORTING .............................................................4718. NOTICE GENERALLY .................................................................................4819. MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................4820. BYLAWS .............................................................................................49300.0 MEMBERSHIP310.0 MEMBERSHIP PROCESS .............................................................................51320.0 SCHOOL MEMBERS .................................................................................51330.0 MEMBER SCHOOL CLASSIFICATIONS ...............................................................52340.0 FEE SCHEDULE ......................................................................................52350.0 GENERAL MEMBERSHIP POLICIES .................................................................53360.0 ATHLETIC ASSOCIATIONS ............................................................................54370.0 ZONES ...............................................................................................54380.0 BCSS CALENDAR ....................................................................................54390.0 DISCIPLINARY JURISDICTION .......................................................................54400.0 CODE OF ETHICS AND DISCIPLINE410.0 CODES OF ETHICS ..................................................................................55420.0 RECRUITMENT AND UNDUE INFLUENCE ...........................................................57430.0 HARASSMENT AND ABUSE ..........................................................................59440.0 MEDIA AND SOCIAL MEDIA .........................................................................62500.0 COMMITTEES AND MEETINGS510.0 ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING ........................................................................63520.0 ANNUAL PLANNING MEETING ......................................................................63530.0 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND CONFIDENTIALITY ...................................................64540.0 BCSS COMMITTEES ..................................................................................64

Page 6

6 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook600.0 SEASONS OF PLAY, TIERING & SANCTIONING 610.0 BC SCHOOL SPORTS OFFICIAL ACTIVITIES .........................................................75620.0 SEASONS OF PLAY .................................................................................75630.0 SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND TIERING CLASSIFICATIONS ..........................................76640.0 SANCTIONING ......................................................................................79700.0 ZONE AND PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 710.0 BCSS ZONE CHAMPIONSHIPS ......................................................................83720.0 BCSS PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS ..............................................................83730.0 ESTABLISHING A PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP HOST ............................................85800.0 ELIGIBILITY AND REGISTRATION810.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE & TEAM ELIGIBILITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89820.0 RESIDENCY REQUIREMENT ........................................................................92830.0 REGISTRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94840.0 JOINTLY SPONSORED TEAMS ......................................................................97900.0 TRANSFERS910.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE TRANSFERS ....................................................................99920.0 TRANSFER EXEMPTIONS ...........................................................................99940.0 TRANSFER PROCESS .............................................................................. 1021000.0 SPORT-SPECIFIC RULES1010.0 AQUATICS ......................................................................................... 1051020.0 BADMINTON ....................................................................................... 1081030.0 BASKETBALL .......................................................................................1121040.0 CROSS COUNTRY ...................................................................................1161050.0 CURLING ............................................................................................1191060.0 FIELD HOCKEY .................................................................................... 1201070.0 FOOTBALL ..........................................................................................1231080.0 GOLF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301090.0 MOUNTAIN BIKING .................................................................................1321100.0 RUGBY (XVs & 7s) .................................................................................. 1341110.0 SKI & SNOWBOARD ................................................................................1371120.0 SOCCER ........................................................................................... 1381130.0 TENNIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431140.0 TRACK AND FIELD ................................................................................. 1461150.0 ULTIMATE .......................................................................................... 1491160.0 VOLLEYBALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1521170.0 WRESTLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Page 7

Page 8

Page 9

Page 10

Page 11

Page 12

Page 13

Page 14

Page 15

Page 16

Page 17

Page 18

18 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookLINDSAY BROOKEPRESIDENT, BC SCHOOL SPORTSI am excited to step into the role as the BC School Sports President. It is a pleasure to work alongside the Board of Directors and the dedicated members of the BC School Sports Staff as we strive to enhance opportunities for our member schools and athletes across the province.I commend the coaches and volunteers whose unwavering dedication ensures that our students have enriching athletic experiences. Their commitment to mentorship and servant leadership is fundamental in shaping the next generation of athletes and leaders.I must emphasize the critical role of teacher-coaches in our schools. While student participation in sports grows, the number of teacher-coaches is unfortunately declining. It is imperative that we support and encourage teachers to stay engaged in high school athletics, safeguarding the unique and invaluable experience it provides to our students.Looking ahead, I eagerly anticipate attending the BC School Sports Provincial Championships, where our athletes showcase their talents on a prominent stage. These events not only highlight our organization's commitment to excellence but also serve as opportunities for reﬂection and improvement.To our Athletic Directors, thank you for your pivotal role in leading our athletic programs. For those new to the position, I encourage you to seek guidance from experienced peers and advocate for the support necessary to fulﬁll this demanding role effectively.As we embark on another year, I extend a warm welcome to all participants, supporters, and stakeholders. Together, let us uphold the values of sportsmanship, competition, and excellence that deﬁne BC School Sports.To play is good, to win is better, but to love the game is the best.Lindsay BrookeJORDAN ABNEYEXECUTIVE DIRECTOR, BC SCHOOL SPORTSWelcome to the 2024-2025 school year. We are excited to be starting another year full of student-athlete achievements. 2023-2024 marked another milestone in our journey towards excellence in school sports across the province. As we move further from the pandemic’s challenges, our community’s resilience and passion have led to inspiring achievements, including record-high student participation. 2023 -2024 saw the 4th straight year of student-athlete growth. Coming out of the pandemic, educational athletics are as broad as they have ever been. It is a testament to our member schools, and the incredible athletic directors, coaches and volunteers who create opportunities for over 120,000 student-athlete registrations. 23-24 also saw the introduction of the static site travel subsidy, which saw travel subsidy for 9 championships. BCSS collected and then distributed to those schools over $117,000 to assist with the travel costs to these championships that don’t move around the province. Last year the Board of Directors collected feedback from our stakeholders, and are ﬁnalizing the 2024-2028 strategic plan which will be published this fall. One of the top priorities of the plan will include the development of a new website, registration system, streaming portal, and mobile application to build a system that will provide better service to our member schools while reducing the administrative load and making life easier for everyone in school sports.I want to ﬁnish by expressing my deepest thanks to those coaching, volunteering, or assisting in any way. Delivering school sports for over 80,000 kids every year is not a small task, and we have over 10,000 people volunteering as coaches each year, and thousands more volunteering in other ways. A special thank you to the school athletic directors. There is no higher act of servant leadership than that of an AD. As a group, ADs are professional, and knowledgeable, and put kids at the center of all that they do. It is a privilege to work with them each day.I can’t wait to see you on or around the ﬁeld of play and wish all our schools and student-athletes the very best for a great 2024-2025.Yours in sport,Jordan AbneyGREETINGS

Page 19

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 19HISTORYBC School Sports was originally organized in 1965 as the British Columbia Federation of School Athletic Associations (BCFSAA) by a group of interested teachers and administrators. A constitution was adopted in 1966 and ofﬁcially registered with the government in February 1971. Financial support was received from the provincial government in 1970 which assisted the association in opening an ofﬁce in January. Operational funding from government remained in place from 1970 until 2009. The name was changed to BC School Sports in 1980-81. BCSS saw signiﬁcant changes in the mid-80’s, and again in the early 90’s adapting to the changing dynamics of education, and school sport. It wasn’t until 1994 when the eligibility rules all became standardized under BCSS policy for all sports. In more recent history. In late 2017 BCSS undertook a signiﬁcant strategic planning process to assess organizational strengths and weaknesses, and to develop a long-term vision for the organization. The Board of Directors appointed a committee to explore the current BCSS structure to assess its limitations as well as its strength. After a lengthy review the committee recommended a new governance structure, one which would allow enhanced geographical diversity, gender diversity and administrative presence. The intended outcome is to have a more stable legislative process, with an engaged and educated legislative body responsible to ensure proper consideration is given to policy changes. The new governance structure was adopted at the 2021 AGM. Today, BC School Sports has on average about 450 member schools each year throughout the province, with more than 70,000 student athletes participating in 70 provincial championships in 18 recognized sports. PRESIDENTSLindsay Brooke 2024 - PresentBrent Sweeney 2022 - 2024Rick Thiessen 2020 - 2022Mike Allina 2016 - 2020Deb Whitten 2012 - 2016Raj Puri 2006 - 2012Philip Cizmic 2005 - 2006Brian Lynch 2003 - 2005Jeanine Stannard 1999 - 2003Jo Ann Ward 1996 - 1999Bob Lindsay 1995 - 1996Dave Bingham 1993 - 1995Jill Philipchuk 1992 - 1993Ken Bartel 1991 - 1992Dave Derpak 1990 - 1991Collin York 1988 - 1990Bob Ferguson 1987 - 1988Marty Cross 1986 - 1987Robert Jackson 1985 - 1986Keith Lamphear 1984 - 1985Bob Price 1982 - 1984Barry Wright 1981 - 1982Terry Cotton 1980 - 1981Rick Mark 1979 - 1980Bob Stebbings 1978 - 1979Ray Towers 1976 - 1978David Lynn 1975 - 1976Jack Armour 1974 - 1975Court Brousson 1973 - 1974Neal Henderson 1972 - 1973Dan Doyle 1971 - 1972Ed Carlin 1970 - 1971Jim Stewart 1969 - 1970EXECUTIVE DIRECTORSJordan Abney 2016 - PresentChristine Bradstock 2012 - 2016Sue Keenan 2003 - 2012Marilyn Payne 1991 - 2003Gay Gayle 1987 - 1991Don Steen 1970 - 1986 THE EVOLUTION OF BCSS LOGOS

Page 20

Page 21

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 21This Handbook, published annually, serves as the ofﬁcial publication of BC School Sports (BCSS) and is designated to assist school administrators, athletic directors, and coaches with the everyday implementation of interscholastic activities. The Handbook includes the organization’s Constitution, Bylaws, policies and general information pertaining to overall goals and responsibilities for all stakeholders who participate in and help to execute interscholastic activities. School administrators and athletic directors are expected to make the information contained in this handbook available to those responsible for conducting the various interscholastic programs, who in turn are asked to review the policies and guidelines with the participants in their respective programs. From time to time, changes are made to policy throughout the year. It should be noted that the online version of the Handbook, (bcschoolsports.ca) is always considered the current version. WHAT IS BCSS?BC School Sports (originally known as the British Columbia Federation of School Athletic Associations) was formed in 1965 (incorporated in 1971) as a private/non-proﬁt organization with the purpose of regulating, directing, administering, the execution of interscholastic activities in the province of British Columbia. BC School Sports is also recognized by the Canadian Revenue Agency as a registered charity, and we have the ability to provide tax-receipts. WHO MAKES UP BCSS? BC School Sports membership is voluntary and available to any school in BC, recognized by the Ministry of Education (Public, Independent, Francophone, Indigenous, Alternative) that has students enrolled in any or all of grades eight to twelve. The head of each school, traditionally a principal, is the ofﬁcial representative of that member school and is ultimately responsible for the actions and compliance of their school. BCSS encourages schools to appoint an Athletic Director, who in working with the administration, is responsible for the day-to-day operations of the athletics program. HOW SCHOOLS ARE ALIGNED AND CLASSIFIEDGeographically, BCSS divides the province into nine zones run by local zone leadership. Each zone coordinates local league schedules and zone championships, providing the pathway to provincials for schools in their zone. Competitively, member schools are separated into tiers based on their senior grades school enrollment count. In having schools of similar size compete against each other, it provides more equitable competition for the member schools. Sports can have a different number of tiers and tiering thresholds. HOW BCSS PROGRAMS ARE ADMINISTERED Member schools are responsible for upholding the policies, procedures, and bylaws that are approved by the BCSS Legislative Assembly. Member schools are expected to self-monitor for compliance, and self-report infractions to BCSS. Member schools, will determine what sports they can participate in, and what teams to ﬁeld. Member Schools in conjunction with their local association and BCSS Zone will schedule their exhibition, league and tournament schedules. The Legislative Assembly (“The Rule Making Body”) is the decision-making body responsible to the membership for reviewing, discussing, and passing bylaws, policies, and the rules of play for the organization. The Legislative Assembly consists of 53 members.•Three representatives from each BCSS Zone•The Board of Directors•A representative from each of the 9 BCSS partner organizations•The chair of each of the 8 BCSS Policy CommitteesThe Board of Directors is responsible for the interpretation, implementation and enforcement of the policies and rules created by the Legislative Assembly. The Board of Directors will consist of nine members from who will be elected by the Legislative Assembly.Each BCSS Zone will have a leadership group responsible for organizing local regular season play and zone championships which act as the pathway to earn a provincial championship berth. All zones recieve one automatic berth to each of the BCSS provincial championships and may be awarded more based on their zone strength, participation numbers, or hosting opportunities. BCSS has 9 zones which include:•Eastern Valley •Fraser North •Kootenay•North Central•Northwest•South Fraser•Thompson-Okanagan•Vancouver Island•Vancouver Sea-to-SkyABOUT BCSS

Page 22

22 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookBCSS awards 70 provincial championships each year across our 18 activities.HOW IS BCSS FUNDED?The majority of BCSS revenue is generated by Membership Dues paid by the member schools. Other notable revenue sources include grants, corporate sponsorship, and events.HOW BCSS KEEPS THE MEMBERSHIP AND SCHOOL SPORT COMMUNITY INVOLVED?BCSS provides updates through newsletters, videos and other information throughout the year. We provide access to resources and support for Athletic Directors and administrators in an effort to see the student-athlete experience improved. BCSS is a volunteer driven organization, our Board, Legislative Assembly, committee members, tournament directors, coaches are all volunteers. BCSS is one of the largest volunteer forces in BC, with over 8,000 volunteers supporting kids each year.ORGANIZATION MEMBER AFFILIATIONSSchool Sport Canada (SSC)School Sport Canada is the national body for school sport in Canada. SSC is the largest structured sport organization in Canada with over 750,000 student athletes, 52,000 coaches and 3,200 schools in the member Provinces and Territories. SSC works to promote and advocate for positive sportsmanship, citizenship, and the total development of student athletes through interscholastic sport. As a proud member, BCSS has access to workshops, resources, and interprovincial learning and networking opportunities.The National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) NFHS is an organization of the ﬁfty autonomous state high school athletic/associations from the United States of America as well as the District of Columbia. Additionally, the nine interscholastic associations from Canada including BCSS are afﬁliate members which provides us and our members access to NFHS resources, events and expertise. The NFHS has a fantastic learning portal with many courses all dedicated to school sport which can be visited at nfhslearn.com. Canadian Interscholastic Athletic Administrators Association (CIAAA) The CIAAA promotes educational athletics through the professional development of athletic administrators with a focus on character and leadership. They support schools in building positive athletic environments that enhance the learning experience for all students. As a partner province, BCSS athletic directors are automatically members of CIAAA and have access to leadership training programs, resource banks, certiﬁcation in athletic administration, conference opportunities and a master’s degree program. More information can be found at www.ciaaa.ca

Page 23

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 23DEFINITIONSBC SCHOOL SPORTS – Throughout the Rules and Regulations, BC School Sports will be referred to as BCSS.DATE OF TRANSFER – A transfer is deemed to have occurred on the date the student is physically present and taking courses at the receiving school.ELIGIBILITY OFFICER – The Eligibility Ofﬁcer is responsible for determination of student-athlete eligibility as deﬁned in the BCSS policies and Rules and Regulations.GRADE 8 ENTRY DATE – The date when a student-athlete enters grade eight (8) for the ﬁrst time.PLAYING DAY – A calendar day on which a member school team or student-athlete participates in competition of a BCSS activity, excluding playoffs, championships and fundraising or promotional games. Number of allowed playing days differs by sport, the number of allowable playing days is noted for each sport in (Section 1000).PLAYOFF – Competition on the path to or at provincials following the conclusion of the regular season.SCRIMMAGE – Any school or coach organized activity with student-athletes from multiple schools or teams present, participating in a BCSS activity against one another, under the guidance and/or supervision of coaches from their respective schools, where ofﬁcials may or may not be present, or where a score may or may not be kept.STARS – BC School Sports online student-athlete registration system.STUDENT-ATHLETE – A student-athlete who is deemed eligible to compete for his/her school. TIER – The threshold at which a BCSS member school will compete in each activity. The threshold is determined by grade 11 & 12 school populations as shown on the 1701 report from the Ministry of Education.1701 MINISTRY OF EDUCATION REPORT – The report collects information about each school within the province for funding purposes, student movement, and enrollment trends. BCSS uses this report for school population purposes.OPEN ACTIVITY – A BCSS activity that does not have a gender requirement to complete the team composition, the team may have any combination of student- athletes regardless of their gender identity. CO-ED ACTIVITY – A BCSS ofﬁcial activity that has a gender requirement to complete the team composition, the team must have a speciﬁc number of student-athletes that identify as male and/or female to be eligible to compete.

Page 24

Page 25

Page 26

26 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook2024-2025 LEGISLATIVE ASSEMBLY REPRESENTATIVESNAME SCHOOL EMAIL ADDRESSBOARD OF DIRECTORSLindsay Brooke St. Michaels University School lindsay.brooke@smus.caBrent Sweeney South Delta Secondary bcsweeney@deltasd.bc.caArnar Bernhardsson Kelowna Secondary arnar.bernhardsson@sd23.bc.caBal Ranu Queen Elizabeth Secondary ranu_b@surreyschools.caRick Lopez Vancouver School Board rlopez@vsb.bc.caVladimir Nikic North Delta Secondary vnikic@deltaschools.caDeanna Schaper-Kotter Notre Dame Regional Secondary dschaper-kotter@ndrs.orgRachel Romero Fernie Secondary rachel.romero@sd5.bc.caGian Cavaliere Merritt Secondary gcavaliere@365.sd58.bc.caKOOTENAY ZONE REPRESENTATIVESSean Sinclair Mount Baker Secondary sean.sinclair@sd5.bc.caRiley Friesen Grand Forks Secondary riley.friesen@sd51.bc.caJoe Moreira Mount Sentinel Secondary joe.moreira@sd8.bc.caTHOMPSONOKANAGAN ZONE REPRESENTATIVESBrian Tommasini Sa-Hali Secondary btommasini@sd73.bc.caMary Bartucci Sa-Hali Secondary mbartucci@exc.sd73.bc.caJody Vosper Sa-Hali Secondary jvosper@exc.sd73.bc.caNORTH CENTRAL ZONE REPRESENTATIVESLouise Holmes Duchess Park Secondary lholmes@sd57.bc.caKeith Wood Prince George Secondary kwood@sd57.bc.caJay Guillet College Heights Secondary jguillet@sd57.bc.caNORTHWEST ZONE REPRESENTATIVESJames Horner Bulkley Valley Christian School jhorner@bvcs.caDebi Laughlin Gidgalang Kuuyas Naay Secondary dlaughlin@sd50.bc.caDavid Rodrigues Mount Elizabeth Secondary david.rodrigues@cmsd.bc.caVANCOUVER ISLAND ZONE REPRESENTATIVESDarren Reisig Claremont Secondary dreisig@saanichschools.caNicole McRae Wellington Secondary nmcrae@sd68.bc.caPhil Ohl Spectrum Community School pohl@sd61.bc.caEASTERN VALLEY ZONE REPRESENTATIVESSean Wicker SD 33 Board Ofﬁce sean_wicker@sd33.bc.caColleen Sullivan Chief Dan George School colleen.sullivan@abbyschools.caJake Mouritzen G.W. Graham Secondary jake_mouritzen@sd33.bc.caSOUTH FRASER ZONE REPRESENTATIVESBill Richards North Delta Secondary brichards@deltaschools.ca Courtney O'Brien Clayton Heights Secondary obrien_c@surreyschools.caNik Nashlund Steveston-London Secondary nnashlund@sd38.bc.caFRASER NORTH ZONE REPRESENTATIVESAllen Tsang Cariboo Hill Secondary allen.tsang@burnabyschools.caCraig Percevault Dr. Charles Best Secondary cpercevault@sd43.bc.caAmber Norris Alpha Secondary amber.norris@burnabyschools.caVANCOUVER SEATOSKY ZONE REPRESENTATIVESShauna Underwood Killarney Secondary sunderwood@vsb.bc.caClaude Leduc Mulgrave Secondary cleduc@mulgrave.comPat Lee John Oliver Secondary ptlee@vsb.bc.ca

Page 27

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 27NAME COMMITTEE EMAIL ADDRESSCOMMITTEE CHAIRSMike ThompsonSport Medicine and Athlete Safety Committee (SMASC)mbthompson@sd61.bc.caPeter Westhaver Eligibility Appeals Committee (EAC) pwesthaver@saanichschools.caJackie Snell Competitive Fairness Committee (CFC) jsnell@saanichschools.caGary Atwal Fall Sports Rules Committee (FRC) atwal_g@surreyschools.caZoel Thibault Winter Sports Rules Committee (WRC) thibault_z@surreyschools.caChris Ellett Spring Sports Rules Committee (SRC) ellett_c@surreyschools.caMark FennIndividual Sports Championship Committee (ICC)mfenn@sd44.caMike CampbellTeam Sports Championship Committee (TCC)mike.campbell@ncsnanaimo.comSTAKEHOLDER ORGANIZATIONSAndrew HollandBC Schools Superintendents' Association (BCSSA)holland_a@surreyschools.caTracy Lofﬂer BC School Trustees' Association (BCSTA) tlofﬂer@bcsta.orgCheryl BlondinBC Confederation of Parent Advisory Councils (BCCPAC)cherylblondin@bccpac.bc.caSid JawandaBC Principals and Vice Principals Association (BCPVPA)sjawanda@sd57.bc.caVacant Ministry of Education VacantVacantMinistry of Tourism, Arts & Culture (Sport Branch)VacantJosh Ogilvie BC Teachers Federation (BCTF) psac54@bctf.caShawn Chisolm Federation of Independent Schools (FISA) shawn@ﬁsabc.caRick BrantIndigenous Sport, Physical Activity and Recreation Council (ISPARC)rbrant@isparc.ca2024-2025 COMMITTEE CHAIRS & STAKEHOLDER ORGANIZATIONS

Page 28

28 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook2024-2025 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP DATESFALLSPORT TIER CHAMPIONSHIP DATES LOCATIONCROSS COUNTRY A/AA/AAA NOVEMBER 2 VANCOUVERAQUATICS AA/AAA NOVEMBER 15-16 RICHMONDFIELD HOCKEYAA NOVEMBER 6-8 VICTORIAAAA NOVEMBER 6-8 KELOWNASOCCER - BOYSA OCTOBER 30 - NOVEMBER 1 BURNABYAA NOVEMBER 18-20 BURNABYAAA NOVEMBER 21-23 BURNABYVOLLEYBALL -GIRLSA NOVEMBER 28-30 NANAIMOAA NOVEMBER 28-30 MILL BAYAAA NOVEMBER 28-30 WEST VANCOUVERAAAA NOVEMBER 28-30 SURREYVOLLEYBALL -BOYSA NOVEMBER 28-30 ABBOTSFORDAA NOVEMBER 27-30 VERNONAAA NOVEMBER 27-30 VICTORIAFOOTBALL AA/AAA NOVEMBER 30 VANCOUVERWINTERSPORT TIER CHAMPIONSHIP DATES LOCATIONSKI/SNOWBOARD N/A FEBRUARY 24-26 QUESNELWRESTLING N/A FEBRUARY 20-22 VANCOUVERCURLING N/A FEBRUARY 26 - MARCH 1 KIMBERLEYBASKETBALL - GIRLSA/AAA/AAA/AAAAFEB 26 - MARCH 1 LANGLEYBASKETBALL - BOYSA/AAA/AAA/AAAAMARCH 5-8 LANGLEYSPRINGSPORT TIER CHAMPIONSHIP DATES LOCATIONULTIMATE AA/AAA MAY 22-23 SURREYMOUNTAIN BIKING N/A MAY 22-23 TBABADMINTON N/A MAY 29-31 TBATENNIS AA/AAA MAY 22-24 TBASOCCER -GIRLSA MAY 29-31 DUNCANAA MAY 28-30 BURNABYAAA MAY 29-31 VICTORIAGOLFA JUNE 2-4 TBAAA JUNE 2-4 TBAAAA JUNE 2-4 TBARUGBY AA/AAA MAY 28-31 ABBOTSFORDTRACK & FIELDMULTI EVENTS MAY 30-31 TBAAA/AAA JUNE 5-7 TBABCSS CALENDAR: www.bcschoolsports.ca/calendar

Page 29

Page 30

Page 31

Page 32

32 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook220.0 BYLAWS1. INTERPRETATION1.1 DeﬁnitionsIn these Bylaws and the Constitution of the Society, unless the context otherwise requires:(a) “Act” means the Societies Act, S.B.C. 2015, c. 18, as amended from time to time, and includes any successor legislation thereto;(b) “Address of the Society” means the address of the Society as ﬁled from time to time with the Registrar;(c) "Alter” means amend, add to, delete or replace;(d) “Appointing Entities” means the following entities:(i) BC Confederation of Parent Advisory Councils;(ii) BC Principals and Vice Principals Association;(iii) BC School Trustees’ Association;(iv) BC School Superintendents’ Association;(v) BC Teachers Federation;(vi) Federation of Independent School Associations; (vii) Indigenous Sport, Physical Activity and Recreation Council;(viii) Ministry of Education; and(ix) Ministry of Tourism, Arts, Culture & Sport; (e) “Board” means the Directors acting as authorized by Act, the Constitution and these Bylaws in managing or supervising the management of the affairs of the Society and exercising the powers of the Society;(f) “Board Resolution” means:(i) a resolution passed by a simple majority of the votes cast in respect of the resolution by the Directors entitled to vote on such matter in person at a duly constituted meeting of the Board:(ii) a resolution that has been submitted to all Directors and consented to in writing by 2/3 of the Directors who would have been entitled to vote on the resolution at a meeting of the Board, and a resolution so consented to is effective as though passed at a meeting of the Board;(g) “Bylaws” means the bylaws of the Society as ﬁled with the Registrar;(h) “Constitution” means the constitution of the Society as ﬁled with the Registrar;(i) “Designated Representative” of a Member School means the Person appointed in accordance section 2.12 to be the representative and contact for that Member School and to exercise the rights and obligations of membership on behalf of the Member School;(j) “Directors” means those Persons who are, or who subsequently become, directors in accordance with these Bylaws and have not ceased to be directors;(k) “District Based Administrator” means a Person who is the Superintendent, Assistant Superintendent, District Principal, Director of Instruction or other position with similar duties and responsibilities by whatever title they are known;(l) “General Meeting” means a meeting of the Members, and includes any annual general meeting and any special or extraordinary general meetings of the Society;(m) “Income Tax Act” means the Income Tax Act, R.S.C. 1985 (5th Supp.), c.1 as amended from time to time;(n) “Legislative Assembly” means the body of Legislative Assembly Members, assembled in a duly constituted General Meeting and acting as authorized by the Act and these Bylaws;(o) “Local Athletic Association” means an Organization (whether or not separately incorporated) usually of a single or small number of school districts, existing to coordinate local school sport competitions within a deﬁned geographic boundary within the Province of British Columbia;(p) “Members” means those Persons and Schools that are, or that subsequently become, members of the Society in any class of membership in accordance with these Bylaws and that, in either case, have not ceased to be members of the Society;(q) “Ministry of Education” means the Ministry of Education of the Province of British Columbia, or its successor ministry;(r) “Ordinary Resolution” means:(i) a resolution passed by a simple majority of the votes cast in respect of the resolution by those Members

Page 33

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 33 in good standing entitled to vote in person, at a duly constituted General Meeting; or(ii) a resolution that has been submitted to the Members and consented to in writing by at least 2/3 of the voting Members who would have been entitled to vote on the resolution in person at a General Meeting, and an Ordinary Resolution approved by any one or more of these methods is effective as though passed at a General Meeting of the Society;(s) “Organization” means an association, corporation or society;(t) “Person” means a natural person;(u) “President” means the Person elected to the ofﬁce of president in accordance with these Bylaws;(v) “Principal” means a person who is the head administrator of a Member School by whatever title they are known;(w) “Registered Address” of a Member or Director means the address of that Person or Organization as recorded in the register of Members or the register of Directors;(x) “Registrar” means the Registrar of Companies of the Province of British Columbia;(y) “School” means:(i) a school in British Columbia that is accredited by the Ministry of Education as an elementary-junior secondary school, elementary-secondary school, middle school, junior secondary school, senior secondary school, secondary school, online learning school, alternate school or independent school; or(ii) a ﬁrst nation school in British Columbia that is accredited by the government of Canada; (z) “School Based Administrator” means a Person who is the Principal, vice-principal, head administrator, assistant head administrator or other position with similar duties and responsibilities by whatever title they are known;(aa) “Secretary” means a Person elected to the ofﬁce of secretary in accordance with these Bylaws;(bb) “Society” means “BC School Sports”;(cc) “Special Resolution” means:(i) a resolution, of which the notice required by the Act and these Bylaws has been provided, passed by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the votes cast in respect of the resolution by those Members entitled to vote in person, at a duly constituted General Meeting; or(ii) a resolution that has been submitted to the Members and consented to in writing by every Member that would have been entitled to vote on the resolution in Person at a General Meeting, and a Special Resolution approved by any one or more of these methods is effective as though passed at a General Meeting;(dd) “Treasurer” means a Person elected to the ofﬁce of treasurer in accordance with these Bylaws;(ee) “Vice-President” means a Person elected to the ofﬁce of vice-chair in accordance with these Bylaws; and(ff) “Zone” or “Designated Zone” means those geographic regions set out in Schedule A, to facilitate representative structure for the Society, as amended from time to time by Ordinary Resolution.1.2 Societies Act DeﬁnitionsExcept as otherwise provided, the deﬁnitions in the Act on the date these Bylaws become effective apply to these Bylaws and the Constitution.1.3 Plural And Singular FormsIn these Bylaws, a word deﬁned in the plural form includes the singular and vice-versa.1.4 SchedulesThe schedules attached to these Bylaws do not form part of the Bylaws. Schedule A may be updated or altered by Board Resolution from time to time. Schedule B may be updated or altered by Ordinary Resolution from time to time.2. MEMBERSHIP2.1 Admission to MembershipMembership in the Society will be restricted to:(a) those Persons and Schools who transition as Members pursuant to Bylaw 2.12; and(b) those Persons and Schools who subsequently become Members in accordance with these Bylaws. There will be one (1) class of voting membership, called the Legislative Assembly Members, and one (1) class of non-voting membership, called Member Schools.

Page 34

34 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook2.2 Classes of MembershipThere will be one (1) class of voting membership, called the Legislative Assembly Members, and one (1) class of non-voting membership, called Member Schools.2.3 Eligibility for Legislative Assembly MembershipLegislative Assembly membership is restricted to:(a) the Directors of the Society, in accordance with section 2.4;(b) the chair of certain committees, in accordance with section 2.5;(c) three (3) representatives appointed by each Zone, in accordance with section 2.6; and(d) one (1) representative appointed by each Appointing Entity, in accordance with section 2.7.2.4 Directors are Legislative Assembly MembersEach Person who is a Director of the Society in accordance with these Bylaws, as amended from time to time, is automatically and without further action a Legislative Assembly Member, and will continue as a Legislative Assembly Member so long as that Person continues to be a Director.2.5 Committee Chairs are Legislative Assembly MembersEach Person who is the chairperson of the:(a) Individual Sports Championships Committee;(b) Team Sports Championships Committee;(c) Fall Sports Rules Committee;(d) Winter Sports Rules Committee;(e) Spring Sports Rules Committee;(f) Eligibility Appeals Committee; (g) Competitive Fairness Committee; and(h) Sport Medicine and Athlete Safety Committee,is automatically and without further action a Legislative Assembly Member, and will continue as a Legislative Assembly Member so long as that Person continues to be the chairperson of one of the above-listed committees.2.6 Appointment by Zones On or before June 30th of each calendar year each Zone may appoint three (3) Persons to be Legislative Assembly Members, including the following:(a) at least (1) School or District Administrator; (b) at least (1) Person who is male; and(c) at least (1) Person who is female, by delivering a notice of appointment in writing signed by an authorized signatory to the Address of the Society. Appointed Persons must be nineteen (19) years of age or older, and employed by a school or district in the relevant zone.The Zone may appoint one (1) Person to be an alternate for each Legislative Assembly Member by delivering a notice of appointment in writing signed by an authorized signatory to the Address of the Society. The Persons appointed as alternate Legislative Assembly Members must have the same qualiﬁcations in paragraphs (a) to (c) as the Legislative Assembly Member for which they are serving as an alternate. A Zone may revoke the appointment of a Legislative Assembly Member or an alternate Legislative Assembly Member it appointed by delivering a notice of revocation in writing signed by an authorized signatory to the Address of the Society.2.7 Appointment by Appointing EntitiesOn or before June 30th of each calendar year each Appointing entity may appoint one (1) Person to be a Legislative Assembly Member and one (1) alternate appointee by delivering a notice of appointment in writing signed by an authorized signatory to the Address of the Society. Appointed Persons must be nineteen (19) years of age or older.An Appointing Entity may revoke the appointment of a Legislative Assembly Member it appointed or their alternate by delivering a notice of revocation in writing signed by an authorized signatory to the Address of the Society.2.8 Term of Appointed Legislative Assembly MembersThe term of a Legislative Assembly Member appointed or their alternate in accordance with sections 2.6 and 2.7 will beginon August 1st of the year in which the Person is appointed and continue until July 31st of the next calendar year, unless he

Page 35

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 35or she otherwise ceases to be a Legislative Assembly Member in accordance with these Bylaws. A Person may be appointed as a Legislative Assembly Member for consecutive terms without limit.2.9 Eligibility for Member SchoolsA School may be eligible to be accepted as a Member School if it:(a) meets the deﬁnition of a School as provided in paragraph 1.1(w); and(b) is a member in good standing of their Zone,provided that the Board may, on application by a School, waive the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section if the School demonstrates a valid reason why it cannot be a member of the applicable Zone.2.10 Application for Member SchoolsA School may submit to the Society a written application, in such form as may be approved by the Society, to become a Member School.An application for Member Schools must include:(a) all information required by the Society to process the application; (b) the name and contact information of a Person to be the Designated Representative of the School Member; and(c) payment of applicable membership dues and fees.2.11 Acceptance of Application for MembershipFollowing the receipt and review of its application, conﬁrmation of eligibility and receipt of applicable membership dues or fees, the Board, or its designate, may accept a School as a Member School by entering the School into the register of Members. The Board may, by Board Resolution postpone or refuse an application for membership for any reason which, in the Board’s view, is necessary or prudent to protect the reputation and integrity of the Society.2.12 Designation of Representative by Member SchoolA Member School may exercise the rights of membership through its Designated Representative, who will be the primary point of contact between the Society and the Member School. The Principal of a Member School will be the Designated Representative for that Member School, provided that the Principal may designate in writing another employee of the Member School as Designated Representative.A Member School may have only one Designated Representative at a time and may change its Designated Representative by providing notice in writing to the Address of the Society.2.13 Membership not TransferableMembership is not transferable by a Member.2.14 Transition of Membership(a) each School that is a member of the Society in good standing (as determined in accordance with these Bylaws) and who is eligible for membership under these Bylaws will continue as a Member in the appropriate class until ceasing in accordance with these Bylaws; and(b) each School that is not a member of the Society in good standing (as determined in accordance with these Bylaws) or who is not eligible for membership under these Bylaws will be deemed to have resigned from membership effective that date.2.15 Cessation of MembershipA Person or School will immediately cease to be a Member:(a) in the case of a Legislative Assembly Member who is either a Director, in accordance with section 2.4, or the chairperson of a Policy Committee, in accordance with section 2.5, on the date he or she ceases to be a Director or chairperson of a Policy Committee, as the case may be;(b) in the case of a Legislative Assembly Member appointed in accordance with sections 2.6 or 2.7:(i) upon the date such Member’s nomination is revoked by the members’ Zone or Appointing Entity; or(ii) upon the expiry of his or her term;(c) in the case of a Member School, upon ceasing to be a School, or ceasing to be otherwise eligible for membership in accordance with section 2.9; or(d) in the case of any Member:(i) upon the date which is the later of the date of delivering his, her or its resignation in writing to the

Page 36

36 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook Secretary or to the Address of the Society and the effective date of the resignation stated thereon; (ii) upon the date which is sixty (60) days from the date on which such Member ceases to be in good standing for non-payment of an amount due and owing to the Society (if any); (iii) upon his, her or its expulsion; or(iv) upon his or her death, or in the case of an Organization, upon its dissolution.3. MEMBERSHIP RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS3.1 Rights of MembershipIn addition to any rights conferred by the Act, a Member in good standing has the following rights and privileges of membership, by class:Legislative Assembly Member:(a) to receive notice of, and to attend, all General Meetings;(b) to make or second motions at a General Meeting and to speak in debate on motions under consideration in accordance with such rules of order as may be adopted;(c) to exercise a vote on matters for determination at General Meetings; and(d) to nominate eligible Persons for election as a Director, in accordance with these Bylaws.Member School:(e) to receive notice of, and to attend, all General Meetings;(f) to speak to motions under consideration in accordance with such rules of order as may be adopted;(g) Persons afﬁliated with a Member School may serve on committees of the Society, as invited;(h) may participate in the programs and initiatives of the Society, in accordance with such criteria as may be determined by the Board from time to time.3.2 Member not in Good StandingA Member that is not in good standing has the right to receive notice of, and to attend, all General Meetings, but is suspended from all of the other rights set out in section 3.1 for so long as he, she or it remains not in good standing.3.3 DuesAll fees payable by Members to the Society, including annual fees and special levies and assessments, will be determined by the Board after considering the recommendations of the Legislative Assembly Members.Annual membership fees are payable by every Member no later than ﬁfteen (15) days after the fall team registration deadline each year. The Board may, by Board Resolution, make changes to the annual membership fees, which will take effect as determined by the Board.3.4 Renewal and Reapplication of Member SchoolsA Member School may renew its membership prior to its expiry by completing the renewal opt-in process and by paying applicable annual membership fees before the fall team registration deadline of each year, as outlined in the Society’s policy. A Member School whose membership has lapsed may reapply for membership after its expiry in accordance with section 2.10.3.5 Standing of MembersAll Members are deemed to be in good standing except:(a) a Member that has failed to pay such annual membership dues as are determined by the Board, if any, when due and owing and such Member is not in good standing so long as such amount remains unpaid; and(b) a Member that has been suspended by the Society. 3.6 Compliance with Constitution, Bylaws and PoliciesEvery Member will, at all times:(a) uphold the Constitution and comply with these Bylaws, the Regulations and the policies of the Society in effect from time to time; (b) abide by such codes of conduct and ethics adopted by the Society; and(c) further, the purposes, aims and objectives of the Society.

Page 37

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 373.7 Suspension or Discipline of MembersA Member may be suspended or otherwise disciplined for breach of section 3.6 or for any conduct which the Board considers to be illegal, improper, unbecoming or likely to endanger the interests or reputation of the Society.On receipt of a complaint, or of its own motion, the Board, or a committee thereof, may investigate, in accordance with such policies and procedures as the Board has established, the conduct of a Member with a view to determining whether discipline is appropriate. Where a Member is under investigation, the Board or its designate will promptly provide notice in writing to the Member of the nature of the investigation and the alleged wrongful conduct and provide the Member with an opportunity to submit a response, in writing or in person, as the Board or designate determines appropriate in the circumstances, prior to the close of the investigation.Following an appropriate investigation, the Board or its delegate will issue a report of its ﬁndings and may suspend or otherwise discipline the Member under investigation, if discipline is determined to be warranted in the circumstances.The Board may establish policies and procedures to administer and facilitate the process of Member discipline, provided that such policies and procedures are not contrary to the Act or these Bylaws. 3.8 Expulsion of MembersFollowing an appropriate investigation in accordance with section 3.7, a Member may be expelled by Board Resolution.Notice of a Board Resolution to expel a Member will be accompanied by a brief statement of the reasons for the proposed expulsion and a copy of the notice will be provided to the Member in question. The Member that is the subject of the proposed expulsion will be provided an opportunity to respond to the statement of reasons at or before the time the Board Resolution for expulsion is considered.3.9 No Distribution of Income to MembersTo operate without purpose of gain or proﬁt to its members and any proﬁts or other accretions to the Society shall be used in promoting its objects.4. MEETINGS OF MEMBERS4.1 Time and Place of General MeetingsThe General Meetings of the Society will be held at such time and place, in accordance with the Act, as the Board decides.4.2 Annual General MeetingAn annual general meeting will be held at least once every calendar year, in accordance with the Act.4.3 Extraordinary General MeetingEvery General Meeting other than an annual general meeting is an extraordinary general meeting. The Board will normally call and hold an extraordinary general meeting to serve as an annual planning meeting at least once per year.4.4 Calling of Extraordinary General MeetingThe Society will convene an extraordinary general meeting by providing notice in accordance with the Act and these Bylaws in any of the following circumstances:(a) at the call of the President;(b) when resolved by Board Resolution; or(c) when such a meeting is requisitioned by the Legislative Assembly Members in accordance with the Act.4.5 Notice of General MeetingThe Society will provide notice of every General Meeting to each Member as follows:(a) by e-mail sent to the address provided by each Member who has provided the Society with an e-mail address not less than 21 days and not more than 60 days prior to the date of the General Meeting; and(b) by posting notice of the General Meeting on the Society’s website for Members, for at least 21 days immediately prior to the date of the General Meeting.If necessary in the Board’s discretion, the Society may send notice of a General Meeting to one or more Members either personally, by delivery, courier or by mail posted to such Member’s Registered Address, or, where the member has provided a fax number or e-mail address, by fax or e-mail, respectively.4.6 Contents of NoticeNotice of a General Meeting will specify the place, the day and the time of the meeting and will include the text of every Special Resolution and Ordinary Resolution to be proposed or considered at that meeting.4.7 Omission of NoticeThe accidental omission to give notice of a General Meeting to a Member, or the non receipt of notice by a Member, does not invalidate proceedings at that meeting.

Page 38

38 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook5. PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS5.1 Business Required at Annual General MeetingThe following business is required to be conducted at each annual general meeting of the Society:(a) the adoption of an agenda;(b) the adoption of rules of order;(c) the approval of the minutes of the previous annual general meeting and any extraordinary general meetings held since the previous annual general meeting;(d) consideration of the report of the Directors; (e) consideration of the ﬁnancial statements and the report of the auditor thereon, if any; (f) the consideration of any Members’ proposals submitted in accordance with the Act; (g) the announcement of Directors.The annual general meeting may include other business as determined by the Board in its discretion.5.2 Attendance at General MeetingsEach Member, each Director and the Society’s auditor, if any, are entitled to attend every General Meeting. In addition, the Board may also invite any other Person or Persons to attend a General Meeting as observers and guests. All observers and guests may only address the assembly at the invitation of the Person presiding as chairperson, or by Ordinary Resolution.5.3 Electronic Participation in General MeetingsThe Board may decide, in its discretion, to hold any General Meeting in whole or in part by Electronic Means. When a General Meeting is to be conducted using Electronic Means, the Board must take reasonable steps to ensure that all participants are able to communicate and participate in the meeting adequately and, in particular, that remote participants are able to participate in a manner comparable to participants present in person, if any.Persons participating by Electronic Means are deemed to be present at the General Meeting.5.4 QuorumQuorum for a General Meeting is one-third (1/3) of the total number of Legislative Assembly Members in good standing on the date of the General Meeting.No business, other than the election of a Person to preside as chairperson at the meeting (if required) and the adjournment or termination of the meeting, will be conducted at a General Meeting at a time when a quorum is not present. If at any time during a General Meeting there ceases to be a quorum present, business then in progress will be suspended until there is a quorum present or until the meeting is adjourned or terminated.5.5 Lack of QuorumIf within 30 minutes from the time appointed for a General Meeting a quorum is not present, the meeting, if convened on the requisition of Members, will be terminated, but in any other case it will stand adjourned to the next day, at the same time and place, and if, at the adjourned meeting, a quorum is not present within 30 minutes from the time appointed for the meeting, the Legislative Assembly Members present will constitute a quorum and the meeting may proceed.5.6 Chair of General MeetingThe President (or in the absence or inability of the President, the Vice-President) will, subject to a Board Resolution appointing another Person, preside as chairperson at all General Meetings; but if at any general meeting the President and Vice-President, or such alternate Person appointed by a Board Resolution (if any), is not present within 15 minutes after the time appointed for the meeting or requests that he or she not chair that meeting, the Directors present may appoint one of their number to preside as chairperson at that meeting. If the President and all other Directors present are unwilling to preside as chairperson, the Legislative Assembly Members present will chose one of their number to preside as chairperson.5.7 Alternate ChairIf a Person presiding as chairperson of a General Meeting wishes to step down for all or part of that meeting, he or she may designate an alternate to chair such meeting or portion thereof, and upon such designated alternate receiving the consent of a majority of the Legislative Assembly Members present at such meeting, he or she may preside as chairperson.5.8 Role of ChairThe Person presiding as chairperson of a General Meeting may not move or second a motion or resolution, but may speak in debate on, or answer questions related to, any motion or resolution without surrendering the chair.5.9 AdjournmentA General Meeting may be adjourned from time to time and from place to place, but no business will be transacted at an adjourned meeting other than the business left unﬁnished at the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

Page 39

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 395.10 Notice of AdjournmentIt is not necessary to give notice of an adjournment or of the business to be transacted at an adjourned meeting except where a meeting is adjourned for more than fourteen (14) days, in which case notice of the adjourned meeting will be given as in the case of the original meeting.5.11 Minutes of General MeetingsThe Secretary or such other Person designated by the Board will ensure that minutes are taken for all General Meetings.6. VOTING BY MEMBERS6.1 Ordinary Resolution SufﬁcientUnless the Act, these Bylaws or adopted rules of order provide otherwise, every issue for determination by a vote of the Members will be decided by an Ordinary Resolution.6.2 Entitlement to VoteEach Legislative Assembly Member in good standing is entitled to one (1) vote on matters for determination by the Members. No other Person or Organization is entitled to vote on a matter for determination by the Members, whether at a General Meeting or otherwise.6.3 Voting ProceduresVoting by Legislative Assembly Members is limited to casting votes in person or by Electronic Means (where permitted) during a General Meeting.Voting in person will be by show of hands or voting cards, except that, at the request of any ﬁve (5) Legislative Assembly Members present, a secret vote by written ballot will be required.Voting by Electronic Means will be determined by the Board, provided that voting must occur at the same time as voting in person during a General Meeting in a way that only Legislative Assembly Members are able to cast votes.6.4 Voting by ChairIf the Person presiding as chair of a General Meeting is a Legislative Assembly Member, then they may, in their sole discretion, cast a vote on any motion or resolution under consideration at the same time as voting occurs by all Legislative Assembly Members. A Person presiding as chair who is not a Legislative Assembly Member has no vote.The Person presiding as chair of a General Meeting does not have a second or a casting vote in the event of a tie and a motion or resolution that is tied is defeated.6.5 Voting by ProxyIf a Legislative Assembly Member appointed by a Zone in accordance with Bylaw 2.6 is unable to attend a General Meeting, the Person appointed as an alternate for that Legislative Assembly Member may attend the General Meeting in their place and may exercise the rights of membership on behalf of the Legislative Assembly Member.Proxy voting is otherwise not permitted.7. DIRECTORS7.1 Management of Property and AffairsThe Board will have the authority and responsibility to manage, or supervise the management of, the property and the affairs of the Society.7.2 Duties of DirectorsPursuant to the Act, every Director will:(a) act honestly and in good faith with a view to the best interests of the Society;(b) exercise the care, diligence and skill that a reasonably prudent individual would exercise in comparable circumstances; (c) act in accordance with Act and the regulations thereunder; and(d) subject to sections 7.2(a) to 7.2(c), act in accordance with these Bylaws. Without limiting sections 7.2(a) to (d), a Director, when exercising the powers and performing the functions of a Director, must act with a view to the purposes of the Society.7.3 Qualiﬁcations of DirectorsPursuant to the Act, a Person may not be nominated, elected or appointed to serve (or continue to serve) as a Director if (a) is less than 19 years of age;(b) has been found by any court, in Canada or elsewhere, to be incapable of managing his or her own affairs;

Page 40

40 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook(c) is an undischarged bankrupt; or(d) has been convicted of a prescribed offence within the prescribed period, for which no pardon has been granted, all in accordance with the Act.In addition to the foregoing, a Person may not be nominated, elected or appointed to serve (or continue to serve) as a Director unless he or she:(e) is an athletic director or School Based Administrator of a Member School; or(f) is a district administrator or district athletic coordinator of a British Columbia school district; or(g) is a current or past president of a Zone or local association; and(h) is not suspended or on a signiﬁcant leave of absence from his or her position in paragraphs (e) through (g).7.4 Composition of BoardThe Board will be composed of up to nine (9) Directors, as follows:(a) the President;(b) the Vice-President or Past-President, whichever is currently holding ofﬁce pursuant to Bylaw 11.5; (c) seven (7) Directors-at-large, including the following:(i) at least one (1) representative from an A or AA School;(ii) at least one (1) representative from an AAA or AAA School;(iii) at least one (1) representative of a rural or semi-rural School, qualiﬁed in accordance with section 7.3;(iv) at least one (1) representative of a School in either the Thompson-Okanagan Zone or the Vancouver Island Zone, qualiﬁed in accordance with section 7.3;(v) at least one (1) representative of a School in either the Kootenay Zone, the North Central Zone or Northwest Zone, qualiﬁed in accordance with section 7.3; and(vi) at least one (1) representative of a School in either the Vancouver Sea-to-Sky Zone, the Fraser North Zone, the South Fraser Zone or the Eastern Valley Zone, qualiﬁed in accordance with section 7.3.As part of the above composition, at all times there must be at least two (2) female directors at least one (1) of whom must be a qualiﬁed representative holding a Director-at-large position pursuant to sub-paragraphs 7.4(c)(iv) to 7.4(c)(vi). Further, as part of the above composition, at all times there must be at least two (2) persons meeting the deﬁnition of a School Based Administrator or District Based Administrator. Whereas a District Based Administrator holds a Director-at-large position pursuant to 7.4(c)(i) or 7.4(c)(ii) the District the Director is an employee of must have at least one School in their District that meets the appropriate classiﬁcation. 7.5 Invalidation of ActsNo act or proceeding of the Board is invalid by reason only of there being less than the required number of Directors in ofﬁce.7.6 Transition of Directors’ TermsEach Person who is a Director on the date these Bylaws become effective will continue as a Director for the term to which he or she was most recently elected.7.7 Term of Directors-at-LargeThe term of ofﬁce of Directors-at-large will normally be three (3) years. However, the Board may by Board Resolution determine that some or all vacant Director-at-large positions will have a term of less than three (3) years, the length of such term to be determined by the Directors in their discretion. The term of ofﬁce will commence fourteen (14) days after the date of the annual general meeting at which such Director-at-large was elected. If, however, the Director-at-large was elected other than at an annual general meeting his or her term of ofﬁce will be deemed to have commenced fourteen (14) days after the next annual general meeting.7.8 Consecutive Terms and Term LimitsDirectors-at-large may be elected for up to two (2) consecutive full terms. A Person who has served six (6) consecutive years as a Director-at-large, by any combination of terms, may not be re-elected for at least one (1) year following the expiry of his or her latest term.Notwithstanding the foregoing, if prior to the expiry of the second term of ofﬁce of a Director-at-large, he or she is elected in accordance with these Bylaws to take ofﬁce as the Vice-President, he or she may continue in ofﬁce for the duration of his or her term as Vice-President, President and Past-President, or until he or she otherwise ceases to be a Director in accordance with these Bylaws.

Page 41

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 417.9 Appointment to ﬁll VacancyIf a Director-at-Large ceases to hold ofﬁce before the expiry of his or her term, the Board, by Board Resolution, may appoint a Person qualiﬁed in accordance with section 7.3 to ﬁll the resulting vacancy. The position occupied by an appointed replacement Director will become available for election at the next annual general meeting and each such appointed replacement Director will continue in ofﬁce until the date that is fourteen (14) days afterthe next annual general meeting unless sooner ceasing to be a Director. The appointed replacement Director may run for the vacant position.The period during which a Person serves as an appointed replacement Director does not count toward the term limits set out above.7.10 Removal of DirectorThe Legislative Assembly Members may remove a Director before the expiration of such Director’s term of ofﬁce by Special Resolution and may elect a replacement Director by Ordinary Resolution to serve for the balance of the removed Director’s term.7.11 Ceasing to be a DirectorA Person will immediately and automatically cease to be a Director:(a) upon the date which is the later of:(i) the date of delivering his or her resignation in writing to the President or to the Address of the Society; and (ii) the effective date of the resignation stated therein; (b) upon the expiry of his or her term, unless re-elected; (c) upon the date such Person is no longer qualiﬁed pursuant to section 7.3; (d) upon his or her removal; or(e) upon his or her death.8. ELECTION OF DIRECTORS-AT-LARGE8.1 Election of Directors-at-largeDirectors-at-large will be elected by the Legislative Assembly Members at a General Meeting and will take ofﬁce fourteen (14) days after the date of such meeting.Elections for Directors-at-large may be conducted on a single ballot.8.2 Election by AcclamationIn elections where the number of candidates is equal to or less than the number of vacant positions for Directors-at-large, the nominated candidates are deemed to be elected by acclamation, provided that if any two (2) Legislative Assembly Members so request, a vote will be required, to be conducted as determined appropriate by the Person presiding as chair of the meeting.8.3 Election by Secret BallotIn elections where there are more candidates than vacant positions for Directors-at-large, election will be by secret ballot with the name of each duly nominated candidate appearing individually on the ballot. Candidates will be deemed to be elected in order of those candidates receiving the most votes.8.4 Voiding of BallotNo Legislative Assembly Member will vote for more Directors-at-large than the number of vacant positions for Directors-at-large. Any ballot on which more names are voted for than there are vacant positions will be deemed to be void.9. OFFICERS9.1 OfﬁcersThe ofﬁcers of the Society are the President, either the Vice-President or Past-President, the Secretary and the Treasurer, together with such other ofﬁces, if any, as the Board, in its discretion, may create. The President, Vice-President and Past-President are Directors by virtue of their election or succession to such ofﬁce.The Board may, by Board Resolution, create and remove such other ofﬁces of the Society as it deems necessary and determine the duties and responsibilities of all ofﬁcers. Other ofﬁcers need not be Directors.9.2 Eligibility for Vice-PresidentA Person must serve at least one (1) term as a Director in order to be eligible for election as Vice-President.

Page 42

42 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook9.3 Election of Vice-PresidentThe Vice-President will be elected by the Legislative Assembly Members every two (2) years at the annual general meeting. The election of the Vice-President shall, in those years, be conducted prior to the election for Directors-at-large. Unsuccessful candidates for Vice-President (if any) may, if they wish and if qualiﬁed for available positions, be added to the ballot for as a Director-at-large.In elections where there is only one candidate for election as Vice-President, that candidate is deemed to be elected by acclamation, provided that if any two (2) Legislative Assembly Members so request, a vote will be required, to be conducted as determined appropriate by the Person presiding as chair of the meeting.In elections where there is more than one candidate for election as Vice-President, election will be by secret ballot with the name of each duly nominated candidate appearing individually on the ballot. 9.4 Term of Ofﬁce of Vice-PresidentThe term of ofﬁce of the Vice-President will be one (1) year, commencing on the date that is fourteen (14) days after the annual general meeting at which he or she was elected, and continuing next Vice-President takes ofﬁce approximately two (2) years later.9.5 PresidentThe Vice-Present shall, if he or she consents, continue as President following the completion of his or her term as Vice- President. The term of ofﬁce of the President will be two (2) years, commencing on the date his or her term as Vice-President ends and continuing until a new President takes ofﬁce approximately two (2) years later. 9.6 Past-PresidentThe President shall, if he or she consents, continue as Past-President following the completion of his or her term as President. The term of ofﬁce of the Past-President will be one (1) year commencing on the date his or her term as President ends and continuing until anniversary of his or her taking ofﬁce as Past-President. 9.7 Vice-President or Past-PresidentAt any given time the ofﬁcers of the Society will include a either a Vice-President, or a Past-President, never both. During the year following an annual general meeting at which a Vice-President is elected, the ofﬁcers will include a Vice-President and a President in the second year of his or her term. During the subsequent year, the ofﬁcers will include a President in the ﬁrst year of his or her term and a Past-President. 9.8 Appointment of Secretary and TreasurerEach year at the ﬁrst meeting of the Board following the annual general meeting the Board will appoint Persons to serve as the Secretary and the Treasurer. A Person need not be a Director in order to be appointed as Secretary or Treasurer.9.9 Term of Ofﬁce of Other OfﬁcersThe term of ofﬁce for all other ofﬁcers is two (2) years, commencing on the date the Director is appointed as an ofﬁcer in accordance with these Bylaws and continuing until the ﬁrst meeting of the Board held after the annual general meeting that is held two years later.9.10 Consecutive TermsOfﬁcers other than President, Vice-President and Past-President may be elected or appointed for consecutive terms. A Person who has served ten (10) consecutive years as any ofﬁcer, by any combination of terms and in any ofﬁces, may not be re-elected or appointed for at least one (1) year following the expiry of his or her latest term.9.11 Removal of OfﬁcersA Person may be removed as an ofﬁcer by Board Resolution.9.12 ReplacementShould any ofﬁcer for any reason be unable to complete his or her term, the Board will remove such ofﬁcer from his or her ofﬁce and will appoint a replacement without delay. In the case of the removal of the President, the Vice-President will, if willing, be appointed as President for the remainder of the vacant term, and any succeeding term. In the case of the removal of the Vice-President, the replacement appointed will hold ofﬁce for the remainder of the vacant term, plus the succeeding terms as President and Past-President.9.13 Duties of PresidentThe President will supervise the other ofﬁcers in the execution of their duties and will preside at all meetings of the Society and of the Board.9.14 Duties of Vice-PresidentThe Vice-President will assist the President in the performance of his or her duties and will perform those duties in the absence or inability of the President.The Vice-President will perform such other duties as may be assigned by the Board.

Page 43

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 439.15 Duties of SecretaryThe Secretary will be responsible for making the necessary arrangements for:(a) the issuance of notices of meetings of the Society and the Board;(b) the keeping of minutes of all meetings of the Society and the Board;(c) the custody of all records and documents of the Society, except those required to be kept by the Treasurer;(d) the maintenance of the register of Member Schools; and(e) the conduct of the correspondence of the Society.9.16 Duties of TreasurerThe Treasurer will be responsible for making the necessary arrangements for:(a) the keeping of such ﬁnancial records, reports and returns, including books of account, as are necessary to comply with the Act and the Income Tax Act; and(b) the rendering of ﬁnancial statements to the Directors, Member Schools and others, when required.9.17 Absence of Secretary at MeetingIf the Secretary is absent from any General Meeting or meeting of the Board, the Directors present will appoint another Person to act as secretary at that meeting.9.18 Combination of Ofﬁces of Secretary and TreasurerThe ofﬁces of Secretary and Treasurer may be held by one Person who will be known as the Secretary Treasurer.10. POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE BOARD10.1 Powers of DirectorsThe Board may exercise all such powers and do all such acts and things as the Society may exercise and do, and which are not by these Bylaws or by statute or otherwise lawfully directed or required to be exercised or done by the Members in a General Meeting, but nevertheless subject to the provisions of:(a) all laws affecting the Society; and(b) these Bylaws and the Constitution.Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Board will have the power to make expenditures, including grants, gifts and loans, whether or not secured or interest-bearing, in furtherance of the purposes of the Society. The Board will also have the power to enter into trust arrangements or contracts on behalf of the Society in furtherance of the purposes of the Society.10.2 Board Acts ValidNo rule, decision or resolution of the Society invalidates a prior act of the Board that would have been valid if that rule, decision or resolution had not been made.10.3 Policies and ProceduresThe Legislative Assembly may establish such rules, regulations, policies and procedures relating to sport, fair play, athlete safety and competition as it deems expedient. The Board may establish such rules, regulations, policies or procedures relating to all other aspects of the governance and operations of the Society as it deems expedient. Furthermore, the Board may establish rules, regulations, policies and procedures relating to sport, fair play, athlete safety and competition where there is either no policy in place, or where there is a signiﬁcant risk to the Society. Rules, regulations, policies and procedures relating to sport, fair play, athlete safety or competition established by the Board will be in effect until the next General Meeting where they may either be ratiﬁed or defeated by the Legislative Assembly Members.The Board may interpret and enforce the Society’s rules, regulations, policies and procedures, including those established by the Legislative Assembly and those established by the Board.No rule, regulation, policy or procedure is valid to the extent that it is inconsistent with the Act, the Constitution or these Bylaws. 10.4 Remuneration of Directors and Ofﬁcers and Reimbursement of ExpensesDirectors shall not be remunerated for serving in their capacity as a Director. Directors may be reimbursed for all expenses necessarily and reasonably incurred by him or her while engaged in the affairs of the Society, provided that all claims for reimbursement are in accordance with established policies.10.5 Investment of Property and Standard of CareIf the Board is required to invest funds on behalf of the Society, the Board may invest the property of the Society in any

Page 44

44 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbookform of property or security in which a prudent investor might invest. The standard of care required of the Directors is that they will exercise the care, skill, diligence and judgment that a prudent investor would exercise in making investments in light of the purposes and distribution requirements of the Society. The Board may establish further policies related to the investment of the Society’s funds and property, provided that such policies are not contrary to the Act or these Bylaws.10.6 Investment AdviceThe Directors may obtain advice with respect to the investment of the property of the Society and may rely on such adviceif a prudent investor would rely upon the advice in comparable circumstances.10.7 Delegation of Investment Authority to AgentThe Directors may delegate to a stockbroker, investment dealer, or investment counsel the degree of authority with respect to the investment of the Society’s property that a prudent investor might delegate in accordance with ordinary business practice.11. PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD11.1 Schedule and Place of Board MeetingsThe Board will meet not less than twice each ﬁscal year, but may meet more often and may schedule meetings and otherwise regulate meetings of the Board as it sees ﬁt. Meetings of the Board may be held at any time and place determined by the Board, provided that notice is provided to every Director.11.2 Calling of MeetingsThe President may at any time call a meeting of the Board.Any two (2) Directors may require a meeting of the Board be called as soon as possible by submitting a notice of meeting signed by two or more Directors to the Address of the Society.11.3 Notice of Board MeetingsAt least two (2) days’ notice of a meeting of the Board will be sent to each Director. However, no formal notice will be necessary if all Directors were present at the preceding meeting when the time and place of the meeting was decided or are present at the meeting or waive notice thereof in writing or give a prior verbal waiver to the Secretary.For the purposes of the ﬁrst meeting of the Board held immediately following the election of a Director or Directors conducted at a General Meeting, or for the purposes of a meeting of the Board at which a Director is appointed to ﬁll a vacancy in the Board, it is not necessary to give notice of the meeting to the newly elected or appointed Director or Directors for the meeting to be properly constituted. 11.4 Attendance at Board MeetingsEvery Director is entitled to attend each meeting of the Board. No other Person is entitled to attend meetings of the Board, but the Board may invite any Person or Persons to attend one or more meetings of the Board as advisors, observers or guests.11.5 QuorumQuorum for meetings of the Board will be a majority of the Directors currently in ofﬁce.11.6 Director Conﬂict of InterestA Director who has a direct or indirect material interest in a contract or transaction (whether existing or proposed) with the Society, or a matter for consideration by the Directors:(a) will be counted in the quorum at a meeting of the Board at which the contract, transaction or matter is considered;(b) will disclose fully and promptly the nature and extent of his or her interest in the contract, transaction or matter;(c) is not entitled to vote on the contract, transaction or matter;(d) will absent him or herself from the meeting or portion thereof:(i) at which the contract, transaction or matter is discussed, unless requested by the Board to remain to provide relevant information; and (ii) in any case, during the vote on the contract, transaction or matter; and(e) refrain from any action intended to inﬂuence the discussion or vote.The Board may establish further policies governing conﬂicts of interest of Directors and others, provided that such policies must not contradict the Act or these Bylaws.11.7 Chair of MeetingsThe President (or, in the absence or inability of the President, the Vice-President (if any)) will, subject to a Board Resolution appointing another Person, preside as chair at all meetings of the Board.

Page 45

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 45If at any meeting of the Board the President, the Vice-President and such alternate Person appointed by a Board Resolution, if any, are not present within 15 minutes after the time appointed for the meeting or requests that he or she not chair that meeting, the Directors present may choose one of their number to chair that meeting. 11.8 Alternate ChairIf the Person presiding as chair of a meeting of the Board wishes to step down as chair for all or part of that meeting, he orshe may designate an alternate to chair such meeting or portion thereof, and upon such designated alternate receiving the consent of a majority of the Directors present at such meeting, he or she may preside as chair.11.9 Role of ChairThe Person presiding as chair of a meeting of the Board may, if the Person is a Director, move, second and speak in debate on any motion or resolution at the meeting. In the event of any doubt, dispute or ambiguity in relation to procedural matters or parliamentary process at a meeting of the Board, the person presiding as chair will have the authority to interpret and apply such rules of order as the meeting has adopted and determine matters in accordance with those rules, as well as the Act and these Bylaws.11.10 Minutes of Board MeetingsThe Secretary or such other Person designated by the Board will ensure that minutes are taken for all meetings of the Board.12. DECISION MAKING AT BOARD MEETINGS12.1 Passing Resolutions and MotionsAny issue at a meeting of the Board which is not required by the Act, these Bylaws or such rules of order as may apply to be decided by a resolution requiring more than a simple majority will be decided by Board Resolution.12.2 Resolution in WritingA Board Resolution may be in two or more counterparts which together will be deemed to constitute one resolution in writing. Such resolution will be ﬁled with minutes of the proceedings of the Board and will be deemed to be passed on the date stated therein or, in the absence of such a date being stated, on the latest date stated on any counterpart.12.3 Entitlement to VoteSubject to section 9.6, each Director is entitled to one (1) vote on all matters at a meeting of Board. No other Person is entitled to a vote at a meeting of the Board.12.4 Procedure for VotingExcept where expressly provided for in these Bylaws, voting on matters at a meeting of the Board may occur by any one or more of the following mechanisms, in the discretion of the chair:(a) by show of hands;(b) by written ballot; or(c) by roll-call vote or poll.On the request of any one (1) or more Directors, a vote will be conducted by written ballot or other means whereby the tallied votes can be presented anonymously, in such a way that it is impossible for the assembly to discern how a given Director voted.13. INDEMNIFICATION13.1 Indemniﬁcation of Directors and Eligible PartiesTo the extent permitted by the Act, each Director and eligible party (as deﬁned by the Act) will be indemniﬁed by the Society against all costs, charges and expenses, including legal and other fees, actually and reasonably incurred in connection with any legal proceeding or investigative action, whether current, threatened, pending or completed, to which that Person by reason of his or her holding or having held authority within the Society:(a) is or may be joined as a party to such legal proceeding or investigative action; or(b) is or may be liable for or in respect of a judgment, penalty or ﬁne awarded or imposed in, or an amount paid in settlement of, such legal proceeding or investigative action.13.2 Purchase of InsuranceThe Society may purchase and maintain insurance for the beneﬁt of any or all Directors, ofﬁcers, employees or agents against personal liability incurred by any such Person as a Director, ofﬁcer, employee or agent.

Page 46

46 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook14. COMMITTEES14.1 Creation and Delegation to CommitteesThe Legislative Assembly Members may create such standing policy committees as may from time to time be required by Ordinary Resolution. The Board may create such standing committees, special committees, working groups or task forces as may from time to time be required by Board Resolution. Any such committee will limit its activities to the purpose or purposes for which it is appointed and will have no powers except those speciﬁcally conferred by an Ordinary Resolution or Board Resolution, as the case may be. The Board may delegate any, but not all, of its powers to committees which may be in whole or in part composed of Directors as it thinks ﬁt.14.2 Standing and Special CommitteesUnless speciﬁcally designated as a standing committee, a committee is deemed to be a special committee and any special committee so created must be created for a speciﬁed time period only. A special committee will automatically be dissolved upon the earlier of the following:(a) the completion of the speciﬁed time period; or (b) the completion of the task for which it was created.A list of the current committees of the Society is appended as Schedule A to these Bylaws, which schedule may be amended by the Board to reﬂect changes to committees from time to time.14.3 Terms of Reference and RulesIn the event the Legislative Assembly Members decide to create a committee, the Legislative Assembly Members must establish Terms of Reference for such committee. A committee, in the exercise of the powers delegated to it, will conform to any rules that may from time to time be imposed by the Legislative Assembly Members, in the Terms of Reference or otherwise, and will report every act or thing done in the exercise of those powers at the next General Meeting held after it has been done, or at such time or times as the Legislative Assembly Members may determine.In the event the Board decide to create a committee, the Board must establish Terms of Reference for such committee. A committee, in the exercise of the powers delegated to it, will conform to any rules that may from time to time be imposed by the Board in the Terms of Reference or otherwise, and will report every act or thing done in the exercise of those powers at the next Board meeting held after it has been done, or at such time or times as the Board may determine.14.4 MeetingsThe members of a committee may meet and adjourn as they think proper and meetings of the committees will be governed by the rules set out in these Bylaws governing proceedings of the Board, with such necessary changes having been made to ensure that the language makes sense in the context.15. ZONES15.1 GeneralThere shall be nine (9) Zones that may choose whether or not to incorporate but must have written legislation governing its operations.Zones will be comprised of the Schools, regardless of their Ministry of Education designation of public, independent or otherwise, that physically reside in the geographic boundaries of the Districts as listed below: 1. Kootenay Zone; school districts number 5, 6, 8, 10, and 202. Thompson-Okanagan Zone; school districts number 19, 22, 23, 53, 58, 67, 73, 74 and 83.3. North Central Zone; school districts number 27, 28, 49, 57, 59, 60, 81 and 91.4. Northwest Zone; school districts number 50, 52, 54, 82, 87, 92.5. Vancouver Island Zone; school districts number 47, 61, 62, 63, 64, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 79, 84 and 85.6. Vancouver Sea-to-Sky Zone; school districts number 39, 44, 45, 46 and 48.7. Fraser North Zone; school districts number 40, 41, 42 and 43.8. South Fraser Zone; school districts number 36, 37 and 38.9. Eastern Valley Zone; school districts number 33, 34, 35, 75 and 78.Note: SD 93 (francophone) schools will belong to and compete in the zone that their school physically resides in.15.2 Compliance with the Bylaws and PoliciesEach Zone must comply with these Bylaws and the regulations and policies of the Society in effect from time to time. A Zone may create policies that are more restrictive than these Bylaws and the regulations and policies of the Society, however a Zone may not create or follow policies that are less restrictive than these Bylaws or the regulations and policies of the Society.

Page 47

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 4715.3 Zone President and SecretaryEach Zone must appoint a Person to act as Zone president and another Person to act as Zone secretary.16. EXECUTION OF INSTRUMENTS16.1 No SealThe Society may have a corporate seal but will not use the seal for the purpose of executing documents.16.2 Execution of InstrumentsContracts, documents or instruments in writing requiring the signature of the Society may be signed as follows:(a) for any contract, instrument or document relating to the receipt, payment or obligation for an amount greater than or equal to $10,000, by any two (2) Directors, or by any one (1) Director and one (1) senior management employee; and(b) for contract, instrument or document relating to the receipt, payment or obligation for an amount less than $10,000, by any two (2) employees, including at least one (1) management employee.All contracts, documents and instruments in writing so signed will be binding upon the Society without any further authorization or formality. The Board will have power from time to time by Board Resolution to appoint any ofﬁcer or ofﬁcers, or any Person or Persons, on behalf of the Society either to sign contracts, documents and instruments in writing generally or to sign speciﬁc contracts, documents or instruments in writing.17. FINANCIAL MATTERS AND REPORTING17.1 Fiscal YearThe ﬁscal year of the Society may be determined by the Board from time to time.17.2 Accounting RecordsThe Society will maintain such ﬁnancial and accounting records and books of account as are required by the Act and applicable laws.17.3 Borrowing PowersIn order to carry out the purposes of the Society, the Board may, on behalf of and in the name of the Society, raise or secure the payment or repayment of money in any manner it decides, including the granting of guarantees, and in particular, but without limiting the foregoing, by the issue of debentures.17.4 Restrictions on Borrowing PowersThe Legislative Assembly Members may by Ordinary Resolution restrict the borrowing powers of the Board.17.5 When Audit RequiredThe Society is not required to be audited. However, the Society will conduct an audit or review of its annual ﬁnancial statements if:(a) the Directors determine to conduct an audit or review engagement by Board Resolution; or(b) the Legislative Assembly Members require the appointment of an auditor by Ordinary Resolution,in which case the Society will appoint an auditor qualiﬁed in accordance with, and will comply with all relevant provisions of, Part 9 of the Act and these Bylaws.17.6 Appointment of Auditor at Annual General MeetingIf the Society determines to conduct an audit or review engagement, an auditor will be appointed at an annual general meeting, to hold ofﬁce until such auditor is reappointed at a subsequent annual general meeting or a successor is appointed in accordance with the procedures set out in the Act or until the Society no longer wishes to appoint an auditor.17.7 Vacancy in AuditorExcept as provided in section 19.8, the Board will ﬁll any vacancy occurring in the ofﬁce of auditor and an auditor so appointed will hold ofﬁce until the next annual general meeting.17.8 Removal of AuditorAn auditor may be removed and replaced by Ordinary Resolution in accordance with the procedures set out in the Act.17.9 Notice of AppointmentAn auditor will be promptly informed in writing of such appointment or removal.

Page 48

48 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook17.10 Restrictions on AppointmentA Person who is not independent of the Society in accordance with section 113 of the Act must not be appointed or act as the auditor for the Society.17.11 Auditor’s ReportThe auditor, if any, must prepare a report on the ﬁnancial statements of the Society in accordance with the requirements of the Act and applicable law.17.12 Participation in General MeetingsThe auditor, if any, is entitled in respect of a General Meeting to:(a) receive every notice relating to the meeting to which a Member is entitled;(b) attend the meeting; and(c) to be heard at the meeting on any part of the business of the meeting that deals with the auditor’s duties or function.An auditor who is present at a General Meeting at which the ﬁnancial statements are considered must answer questions concerning those ﬁnancial statements, the auditor’s report, if any, and any other matter relating to the auditor’s duties or function.18. NOTICE GENERALLY18.1 Entitlement to NoticeNotices of a General Meeting will be given to:(a) every Legislative Assembly Member on the register of Members on the day the notice is given;(b) the Designated Representative for every Member School shown on the register of Members on the day the notice is given; and(c) the auditor, if any is appointed.18.2 Method of Giving NoticeExcept as otherwise provided in these Bylaws, a notice may be given to a Member either personally, by delivery, courier or by mail posted to such Member’s Registered Address, or, where the Member has provided a fax number or electronic mail address, by fax or electronic mail, respectively.18.3 When Notice Deemed to have been ReceivedA notice sent by mail will be deemed to have been given on the day following that on which the notice was posted. In proving that notice has been given, it is sufﬁcient to prove the notice was properly addressed and put in a Canadian Government post ofﬁce receptacle with adequate postage afﬁxed, provided that if, between the time of posting and the deemed giving of the notice, a mail strike or other labour dispute which might reasonably be expected to delay the delivery of such notice by the mails occurs, then such notice will only be effective when actually received. Any notice delivered personally, by delivery or courier, facsimile, or electronic mail will be deemed to have been given on the day it was so delivered or sent.18.4 Days to be Counted in NoticeIf a number of days’ notice or a notice extending over any other period is required to be given, the day the notice is given or deemed to have been given and the day on which the event for which notice is given will not be counted in the number of days required.19. MISCELLANEOUS19.1 DissolutionOn the winding up or dissolution of the Society, the assets of the Society shall not be distributed among the Members or any of them, unless such recipient Member or Members are charitable institutions in existence solely for charitable purposes. After all debts have been paid, or provision for their payment has been made, the assets remaining shall be paid, transferred and delivered to one or more charitable institutions in existence solely for charitable purposes, which shall be chosen by resolution of the members of the Society, or failing such resolution, by resolution of the directors of the society.19.2 Inspection of Documents and RecordsThe documents and records of the Society, including the ﬁnancial and accounting records and the minutes of General Meetings, committee meetings and meetings of the Board, will be open to the inspection of any Director at reasonable times and on reasonable notice.A Member in good standing is entitled, upon providing not less than fourteen (14) days’ notice in writing to the Society, to examine any of the following documents and records of the Society at the Address of the Society during the Society’s

Page 49

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 49normal business hours:(a) the Constitution and these Bylaws, and any amendments thereto;(b) the statement of directors and registered ofﬁce of the Society;(c) minutes of any General Meeting, including the text of each resolution passed at the meeting;(d) resolutions of the Members in writing, if any;(e) annual ﬁnancial statements relating to a past ﬁscal year that have been received by the Members in a General Meeting;(f) the register of Directors; (g) the register of Members; (h) the Society’s certiﬁcate of incorporation, and any other certiﬁcates, conﬁrmations or records furnished to the Society by the Registrar;(i) copies of orders made by a court, tribunal or government body in respect of the Society;(j) the written consents of Directors to act as such and the written resignations of Directors; and(k) the disclosure of a Director regarding a conﬂict of interest.Except as expressly provided by statute or at law, a Member will not be entitled or have the right to examine or inspect any other document or record of the Society. However, subject to such policies as the Board may establish, a Member in good standing may request, in writing delivered to the Address of the Society, to examine any other document or record of the Society and the Board may allow the Member to examine the document or a copy thereof, in whole or in part and subject to such redaction as the Board deems necessary, all in the Board’s sole discretion.Copies of documents which a Member is allowed to examine may be provided on request by such Person for a fee to be determined by the Board.19.3 Right to become Member of other SocietyThe Society will have the right to subscribe to, become a member of, and cooperate with any other society, corporation or association whose purposes or objectives are in whole or in part similar to the Society’s purposes.20. BYLAWS20.1 Entitlement of Members to Copy of Constitution and BylawsOn being admitted to membership, each Member is entitled to, and upon request the Society will provide him or her with, access to a copy of the Constitution and these Bylaws.20.2 Special Resolution required to Alter BylawsThese Bylaws will not be altered except by Special Resolution.20.3 Effective Date of AlterationAny alteration to the Bylaws or Constitution will take effect on the date the alteration application is ﬁled with the Registrar in accordance with the Act.

Page 50

Page 51

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 51310.0 MEMBERSHIP PROCESS311.0 CRITERIA FOR MEMBERSHIPAs per BC School Sports Bylaw 2.2 {Classes of Membership}, BC School Sports has two (2) classes of membership:311.1 School: A school in British Columbia that is accredited by the Ministry of Education as an elementary-junior secondary, elementary-secondary, middle school, junior secondary, senior secondary, online learning school, alternate school or non-public school in funding group classiﬁcations 1, 2 or 3, and includes full-time students in any or all of grades eight (8) through twelve (12), and fulﬁllls the requirements of membership in BC School Sports.311.2 Legislative Assembly Member; A representative elected or appointed through a process as approved in the BCSS Bylaws to act and vote on behalf of the BC School Sports Membership. Legislative Assembly Members are comprised of four groups: The Board of Directors, Chairs of the BCSS Policy Committees, Zone Representatives, and Partner Organizations. 320.0 SCHOOL MEMBERS321.0 APPLICATION321.1 Applications for new school membership are due no later than the second Friday after Labor Day Week. Schools that fulﬁll the membership requirements must complete and submit a new member application. Upon approval schools will be invoiced directly for the annual membership fee.322.0 MEMBER SCHOOL RENEWALThe membership year will run from August 1 to July 31. Administrators at members schools that wish to renew their BC School Sports membership must complete the “renewal opt-in" in the BCSS STARS database, no later than the Fall Team Registration Deadline. Once BC School Sports receives the renewal opt-in, the member school will receive an invoice for annual membership fees.322.1 LATE MEMBERSHIP RENEWAL Member schools who fail to renew their membership by the September 30th deadline will be subject to a late membership renewal fee of 10% of their annual dues, with the ﬁrst 10% being applied on the ﬁrst day of October, and the additional 10% increments on each subsequent ﬁrst of the month. Alternate and DL schools will be excluded from the late membership renewal fee.323.0 EXPECTATIONS OF A MEMBER SCHOOLMember schools of BCSS must comply with the rules as stipulated in the BCSS Constitution, Bylaws, and Policies relating to interscholastic programs. Failure to adhere to the above are grounds for discipline at the discretion of the Board of Directors. The rules shall not be waived by agreement or otherwise. All member schools are expected to: 323.1 Ensure that all school programs that are ofﬁcial BCSS activities, operate as such and operate under the jurisdiction of BCSS.323.2 Ensure all BCSS ofﬁcial activities contribute towards the improvement of the health, ﬁtness and general welfare of all individuals taking part in the program.323.3 Ensure safety and welfare of students is a priority. Adequate protective equipment, safety precautions, and risk management policies are to be utilized for all practices and interscholastic competitions. 323.4 Be diligent in monitoring interscholastic competition, knowing that a member school may only participate against other BCSS member schools in ofﬁcial BCSS activities unless out of province sanctioning is approved or an exception is granted in writing by the Executive Director.323.5 Ensure student-athletes are accompanied by a teacher-coach, teacher-sponsor, administrator or responsible adult approved by the administrator, and in accordance with the applicable school and/or school district policy in all ofﬁcial BCSS activities. The school administrator must ensure that the supervisor adheres to all BC School Sport policies, including the Coach’s Code of Ethics as outlined in the BCSS handbook (Section 400). The school administrator should notify the competition coordinator of who the adult supervisor is, should that supervisor be different than the coach. The supervisor must be in attendance for the duration of the competition.323.6 Be responsible for ensuring all coaches, including community coaches, have been properly vetted in accordance with school and/or district policy. Schools are responsible to ensure coaches are educated on BCSS policy, including but not limited to Codes of Ethics (Section 400) and Recruiting, Undue Inﬂuence (Section 430.0) and rules regarding the activity in question. It is also strongly recommended that the school ensures coaches are aware of emergency protocols, supervision requirements, competition schedule and deadlines, accountability for equipment, jurisdictional boundaries and any paper work that is needed prior to commencing coaching duties. 323.7 Ensure all members of a coaching staff (including but not limited to Head Coaches, Assistant Coaches, Coordinators, Teacher Sponsors, Student-Managers), must complete the Concussion Awareness Training Tool (www.cattonline.com) and provide their certiﬁcate of completion to their Athletic Director prior to engaging in any duties with student-athletes in a practice or game setting.323.7.1 Athletic Directors are not required to submit the certiﬁcates but must be able to produce them if requested by BCSS or the member school’s zone.

Page 52

52 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook323.7.2 BCSS will recognize the Concussion Awareness Training Tool Certiﬁcate of completion for a period of two (2) calendar years from the date of completion before having to be completed again.323.8 Member schools should monitor their compliance with BCSS bylaws and policies. Schools are to educate student-athletes, coaches, and other appropriate persons to ensure compliance.323.9 Provide full disclosure of information in all BCSS matters. This includes verbal communication, documentation and an expectation that relevant information will not be omitted or altered. BCSS reserves the right to investigate and/or follow up to ensure the accuracy of information presented during any BCSS matter.323.10 Maintain appropriate crowd control, as per the Spectator Code of Conduct (Section 413), at all interscholastic contests and events.324.0 ROLE OF THE ADMINISTRATOR The administrator of a member school shall be the representative of the member school and is responsible for all ofﬁcial BCSS activities in which the school partakes. The administrator is expected to:324.1 Complete the annual Membership Renewal Process (opt-in) by the applicable deadline.324.2 Ensure all member school expectations are upheld.324.3 Appoint and support the school Athletic Directors with daily interscholastic athletic operations. 330.0 MEMBER SCHOOL CLASSIFICATIONS BC School Sports will use the following school classiﬁcations for the purposes of governance and administration: School population will be calculated as all enrolled students in Grades 8-12, including students designated as Secondary Ungraded (SU). Each BCSS Sport will use its own speciﬁc tiering as found in Section 637.0.○ Class A: 1 – 165 ○ Class AA: 166-475○ Class AAA: 476-950○ Class AAAA: 951+As per the BCSS Bylaws, for the purposes of governance and administration, BCSS will use the following deﬁnition to identify schools as Urban, Semi-Rural or Rural.○ Urban: School: is in a municipal population of 30,000 or greater, or a population less than 30,000 but within 85km of the nearest school within a municipality of greater than 30,000 people. ○ Semi-Rural: School is in a municipal population of 15,000 – 29,999 and more than 85km from the nearest school within an urban municipality.○ Rural: School is in a municipal population of fewer than 15,000 and more than 125km from the nearest school in an urban municipality.340.0 FEE SCHEDULEFees for member schools are charged on an annual basis. Schools receive invoices upon completion of the membership renewal process and payment is due within 15 days of invoice. School population will be calculated from the Ministry of Education Headcount Reports for the previous school year. This information is provided to BCSS directly from the Ministry of Education. Included in the headcount are all full-time students in grades eight (8) through twelve (12), plus the ungraded students at the secondary level. Membership fees per school population category are:2024  2025 MEMBERSHIP FEESClass Category 8-12 + SU Enrollment Senior Middle/Junior Online AltA1 1-75 $535 $310 $310 $2202 76-165 $725 $360 $360 $275AA3 166-299 $980 $420 $420 $3354 300-475 $1,395 $500 $500 $390AAA5 476-675 $1,900 $560 $560 $4406 676-950 $2,460 $670 $670 $495AAAA7 951-1350 $2,935 $750 $750 $5558 1351+ $3,270 $800 $800 $610

Page 53

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 53342.0 SETTING MEMBERSHIP FEES Member Fees are established by the BC School Sports Board of Directors in June, after the BC School Sports Annual General Meeting. An increase in membership fees of greater than 12% can only be made with the approval of the Legislative Assembly.343.0 ADJUSTMENT OF MEMBER SCHOOL FEES Signiﬁcant changes to a school population due to an addition or deletion of a grade, or the re-designation of a school may be adjusted on an individual member school basis by the Executive Director at the request of the member school. 344.0 LEGAL CONTINGENCY FUNDThe Board of Directors, consistent with their responsibility to set dues for the membership, will apply a legal fund surcharge (‘Legal Levy’) as required to maintain a Legal Contingency Fund speciﬁcally to handle the prevention or response to legal action taken against the organization. The target balance of this contingency is $60,000. A levy in the amount greater than $100.00 per school will require Legislative Assembly approval.345.0 CIAAA ATHLETIC DIRECTOR MEMBERSHIP FEE Member schools, except for those that are Online Learning or Alternate Schools, will pay a $60.00 fee annually known as the CIAAA Athletic Director Membership Fee, which will provide CIAAA membership for the AD of record in STARS. 346.0 Each Member School, except for middle, junior, online, or alternate schools will annually pay a Static Site Championship Fee as detailed below.CATEGORY ANNUAL MEMBERSHIP DUES24%(Per section 346.1)10%(Per section 346.2)1 $535.00 $128.40 $53.502 $725.00 $174.00 $72.503 $980.00 $235.20 $98.004 $1,395.00 $334.80 $139.505 $1,900.00 $456.00 $190.006 $2,460.00 $590.40 $246.007 $2,935.00 $704.40 $293.508 $3,270.00 $784.80 $327.00346.1 Schools that meet the criteria in the Vancouver Sea-to-Sky, South Fraser, Fraser North, and Eastern Valley Zones will be charged 24% of their annual dues. 346.2 Schools in the Vancouver Island, Thompson-Okanagan, North Central, Northwest and Kootenay zones will be charged 10% of their annual membership dues. 346.3 The funds collected through the Static Site Championship Fee will be paid out at 100% each year to schools travelling to the championships as found detailed in Section 727.0350.0 GENERAL MEMBERSHIP POLICIES 351.0 RESPONSE TO PROVINCIAL JOB ACTION BCSS believes that student-athletes and their participation in extracurricular activities should be free from political interference; however, the reality is that the majority of teacher-coaches are members of the BCTF and are bound by their professional obligations. In the event of a province-wide strike or job action, the BCSS Board of Directors will make a determination on whether or not league competition and championship play will continue and communicate this decision in a timely fashion. Safety of athletes and competitive balance will be guiding factors in the decision. Superintendents, Sport Advisory Committees and other stakeholders will be consulted. If it is determined that the safety of student-athletes or the competitive integrity of league competition or championship play will be affected, the Board of Directors shall suspend all competition. Public school teams that continue to practice or play during this period of suspension will not be supported by BCSS.352.0 MARKETING352.1 BC School Sports will only entertain marketing partnerships and ventures if they are beneﬁcial to the goals and objectives of the association. Such partnership or ventures could be in the form of cash, product or contract.352.2 BC School Sports will not enter into any sponsorship agreement with a company that is directly involved in the manufacture, distribution or sales of any product related to alcohol or tobacco.352.3 BC School Sports will consider industrial exclusivity as part of a marketing agreement.

Page 54

54 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook353.0 COMMERCIAL LOGOSA member school is permitted the use of a maximum of two (2) credit card size commercial logos on any team uniform. A school uniform consists of the top and bottom or clothing usually worn during competition.360.0 ATHLETIC ASSOCIATIONS361.0 LOCAL ATHLETIC ASSOCIATIONSLocal Athletic Associations play an integral role in interscholastic activities and are designed to facilitate local play within a school district or a collection of districts in close proximity. They should enhance the student-athlete experience and generally, they determine the teams competing at a zone level from their association. BC School Sports recognizes the importance of local athletic associations and will formally afﬁliate Local Associations where the association has:361.1 Stated purposes that are aligned with the purposes of BCSS;361.2 Adopted the competitive policies of BCSS, for activities sanctioned by both BCSS and the local athletic association;361.3 Required membership in BCSS for all local athletic association member schools;361.4 Be recognized by the school district(s) located within the geographic boundaries of the local athletic association as the organizing body of school sports and athletics;361.5 Have written documents governing the actions of the associations, including the designation of a committee responsible for discipline, with deﬁned processes and procedures;361.6 Have a President who is employed by a school district or a BCSS member school.362.0 SCOPE OF THE RESPONSIBILITYLocal athletic associations are responsible for the following:362.1 Applying the Bylaws and policies of BCSS within its geographic region;362.2 Organizing league competitions within its geographic region;362.3 Supporting the objectives and activities of BCSS within its geographic region;362.4 Promoting the purposes and values of BCSS within its geographic region.363.0 DISAFFILIATION A local athletic association may be disafﬁliated by the BCSS Board of Directors.370.0 ZONES371.1 As per the BCSS Bylaws, BCSS will have 9 zones. In addition to the responsibilities as stated in the Bylaws, zones will ○ Appoint 3 persons (and 3 alternates) to the Legislative Assembly, in accordance with the Bylaws;○ Create and follow rules and regulations for zone procedures and determinations;○ Coordinate Zone Championships for qualifying teams and individuals to BCSS Provincial Championships;○ Represent the voices of the schools in the zone, and bring forth motions when appropriate;○ Appoint the Zone Representatives to each of the Sport Advisory Committees.380.0 BCSS CALENDARThe BCSS activity calendar runs Monday to Sunday and will begin with the Civic Day Holiday each August as found in this Handbook.390.0 DISCIPLINARY JURISDICTIONBC School Sports, as the governing body for secondary school sport in British Columbia has the jurisdiction over disciplinary matters as stated in the BC School Sports Bylaws and Policies.390.1 Any disciplinary action taken by a member school, BC School Sports, or a recognized athletic association, against a participant will be recognized by all member schools and athletic associations. This includes membership-wide adherence to any disciplinary action taken involving a probationary period, a suspension or a warning.390.2 The disciplinary jurisdiction of BC School Sports is limited to the disciplined student-athlete, coach, or spectator’s current, continued or future participation or involvement in activities, programs or services of BC School Sports.390.3 Disciplinary action taken by a member school against its students, coaches, volunteers and/or any other participant, including spectators, that is over and above any disciplinary action taken by BC School Sports will be recognized by BC School Sports and all local associations.

Page 55

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 55410.0 CODES OF ETHICS BC School Sports is committed to a safe and positive environment within its programs, activities and events, by making all individuals aware that there is at all times an expectation of appropriate behaviour that is consistent with the values of BC School Sports. 411.0 ATHLETE CODE OF ETHICS BC School Sports, school districts and your school consider it to be a privilege to represent your school in an athletic competition. Therefore, certain behavioural expectations come with this selection. Student-athletes are expected to uphold the following standards:411.1 Treat all participants fairly regardless of gender, race, sexual orientation, religion, physical or mental abilities, political belief or economic status;411.2 Embrace the highest ideals of sportsmanship, ethical conduct and fair play. Be modest in victory and gracious in defeat;411.3 Show respect and give courtesy to opponents, ofﬁcials, volunteers, teammates, spectators and coaches at all times;411.4 Uphold the rules of the sport, spirit of such rules and encourage other athletes to do the same;411.5 Represent yourself, your parents, your school and your community with proper conduct at all times on or off the playing ﬁeld;411.6 Respect other athletes’ dignity and acknowledge that verbal or physical behaviour that constitutes harassment or abuse is unacceptable;411.7 Participate in a manner that ensures the safety of fans, athletes, coaches and ofﬁcials;411.8 Accept decisions of ofﬁcials without dispute;411.9 Shall not use the media, social media or networking forums to criticize or threaten other student-athletes, coaches, ofﬁcials, school teams, spectators or BCSS;411.10 Demonstrate that it is a privilege to represent your school.412.0 COACHES CODE OF ETHICS The coach/student-athlete relationship is a privileged one. Coaches play a critical role in the personal and athletic development of student-athletes. Therefore, coaches are expected to model the fundamentally positive aspects of school sport. Coaches, including community coaches, are expected to uphold the following standards:412.1 Recognize that school sport is an extension of the classroom, and shall conduct themselves accordingly when performing coaching duties;412.2 Observe the Bylaws and Policies of BCSS and those of their local athletic association;412.3 Observe the rules of the sport, the spirit of the rules of the sport, and shall encourage student-athletes to do the same;412.4 Fulﬁlll all competition, invitational, playoff and championship competitive and event obligations;412.5 Treat all participants fairly regardless of gender, race, sexual orientation, religion, physical or mental abilities, political belief or economic status;412.6 Respect the rulings of ofﬁcials without gesture or argument, and shall require student-athletes to do the same;412.7 Shall not use foul, profane, harassing or offensive language or gestures in the conduct of coaching duties;412.8 Shall not use the media, social media or networking forums to criticize or threaten student-athletes, coaches, ofﬁcials, school teams, spectators or BCSS;412.9 Shall not use physical force of any kind in the conduct of coaching duties;412.10 Shall not, under any circumstances, endorse, recommend, or suggest the use of performance-enhancing drugs or supplements by any student-athlete;412.11 Shall not use tobacco products and alcohol while in the presence of student-athletes, and shall discourage their use by student-athletes;412.12 Shall not, under any circumstances, require, suggest or imply that a student-athlete must be involved in any summer program or club program as part of their responsibilities as a school team member;412.13 Shall not, under any circumstances, require, suggest or imply that a student-athlete cannot or should not participate in any BCSS-approved sport in the season preceding or following the coach’s season of play; 412.14 Shall not, under any circumstances, start pre-season tryouts or practices to the detriment of any in-season sport.413.0 SPECTATORS CODE OF ETHICS BC School Sports is committed to ensuring that all student-athletes, coaches and other individuals involved in BCSS activities have the opportunity to participate in a safe and enjoyable environment. Attendance at any BCSS event entitles you to enjoy an exhibition of skills developed by athletes in an educational setting. Spectators are expected to conduct themselves in a

Page 56

56 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook manner which supports the values of BC School Sports, and encourages the development of all student-athletes. Spectators are expected to uphold the following standards:413.1 Show respect to all individuals including, student-athletes, coaches, ofﬁcials, volunteers and fellow spectators. 413.2 Shall not use foul, profane, harassing or offensive language or gestures while in attendance at any BCSS event.413.3 Abstain from consuming any unlicensed alcohol or illegal substances during any BCSS events. 413.4 Remain in designated spectators zones at event locations. 413.5 Shall not use the media, social media or networking forums to criticize or threaten student-athletes, coaches, ofﬁcials, school teams, other spectators or BCSS. 414.0 PROCEDURE FOR COMPLAINTS REGARDING CODE OF ETHICS414.1 Anyone may submit a Code of Ethics complaint to BCSS within 90 days of the incident occurring414.2 All complaints alleging a violation of the Code of Ethics must be submitted in written form via the Code of Ethics Complaint form found on the BCSS website414.3 As per section 415.0, all complaints alleging a violation of the Code of Ethics by a coach, athlete or spectator shall be submitted to BCSS. 414.4 If the alleged violation has occurred in any event prior to Zone Championships, the complaint will be entrusted to the local association for any necessary investigation or action.414.5 At any point during the process if a local association does not have the resources to appropriately deal with the matter, they may request BCSS to assist or take over the investigation.414.6 If the alleged violation has occurred in any event during Zone or Provincial Championships, the complaint will be processed by BCSS.414.7 There is no appeal of a decision of a local athletic association or BCSS.414.8 Both BCSS and the respective local association are required to report any ﬁndings and rulings to one another after the investigation is concluded. 414.9 BCSS reserves the right to disclose Code of Ethics disciplines to any respective provincial sport organization.415.0 CHANNELS OF COMMUNICATION FOR CODE OF ETHICS COMPLAINT

Page 57

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 57420.0 RECRUITMENT AND UNDUE INFLUENCEA policy clearly prohibiting recruiting serves the interest of the organization by prioritizing academics over athletics; protecting young students from exploitation; ensuring an even playing ﬁeld among competing schools; providing for equitable competition; discouraging adults from jeopardizing student’s eligibility; and preventing misuse of athletic programs.421.0 RECRUITING BCSS prohibits the recruiting or inducement of student-athletes. Athletic recruitment undermines the priority of academic education for the student and promotes values that are inconsistent with those of BCSS. Stakeholders have a required duty to discourage an athletically motivated transfer. Failure to discourage a transfer that is athletically motivated constitutes recruitment. The fact that transfer eligibility has been approved in no way excuses recruitment.421.1 Despite compliance with the other eligibility and/or transfer rules of BCSS, any student who attends a member school as a result of recruitment or undue inﬂuence is ineligible for a minimum of one-year. Violations under the policy may also result in sanctions to the school, athletic program, team or coach of the team.421.2 Undue inﬂuence for the purposes of this rule is the attempt by any school related person (including but not limited to, coaches, teachers, administrators, students, alumni or parents) to induce a student through in-person contact, phone, text, social media, email, or the like, to attend a member school.421.3 There are a broad range of behaviours that when considered alone, or in part are deemed to be recruitment. The facts of each allegation will be considered on a case by case basis. The following may indicate that a student has been recruited, but other actions not listed may still be considered:○ Initiating contact with any student who does not attend their school, or a school that as per School District procedures directly feeds into their school, in order to suggest, encourage or explain a transfer.○ Encouraging any other person, including past and present players or parents of past or present players, to contact any student or their parents to suggest, encourage or explain a transfer to a different school.○ Permitting a student who is not currently enrolled at a school to participate in team practices, participate in scheduled team activities (including travel to games, events, team meetings, or trips), attend “open gym”, out- of-season practices, and camps speciﬁcally designated for enrolled students.○ Engaging a student-athlete or parent when they inquire about the school’s sports teams or athletic program. These inquiries must be directed to the school administration.○ Offering or accepting ﬁnancial assistance (including free or reduced tuition/fees) on the basis of a student’s athletic potential or participation in a BCSS activity.○ Offering or promising employment or other ﬁnancial beneﬁt to the student or any member of the student’s family.○ Offering or accepting transportation assistance to a student, parent or guardian.○ Offering or accepting school privileges or considerations not normally granted to other students.○ Offering or accepting assistance in securing a post-secondary athletic scholarship.○ Suggestion or inducement of parents, guardians or students to change their location of residence for athletic reasons.○ Facilitating a change of guardianship for the purpose of changing the location of a student athlete’s residence so that they can transfer schools is recruitment unless there are other compelling reasons for the change of guardianship (e.g. to protect the student from physical or emotional abuse).○ Discussion by a school related person in a club, community, or provincial team environment about their school, athletic program or team.421.4 Any of the above listed or similar actions by a school related person are prohibited when targeted at any students, including those who have not established a home school, as per BCSS policy.421.5 If a person has knowledge of recruitment, as deﬁned herein, he or she shall provide written notice of the allegation to the BCSS Executive Director.421.6 BCSS recognizes that schools may need to attract students. Schools may advertise their athletics program offerings in a generic manner, no different than they would any other academic or co-curricular program. The advertising must be limited to the programs offered and not highlight the success of the program, qualiﬁcations of a coach or any other identiﬁer that would increase the chance of enrollment from a prospective student. School advertising, where athletics are included, must not be targeted in any way towards potential students who may display athletic potential.422.0 PROCEDURE FOR COMPLAINTS REGARDING RECRUITING422.1 Recruiting or undue inﬂuence complaints shall be submitted to the BCSS Executive Director in writing. Complaints submitted through any other submission method will not be accepted. The enrollment of a student at a school due to recruiting or undue inﬂuence must have happened while the student in question still held eligible status with BCSS.

Page 58

58 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook The complaint must include:○ The name of the school and, if applicable, person(s) allegedly having contravened the recruiting and undue inﬂuence policy;○ The name of the student(s) who have been targeted by the recruiting action;○ Some form of evidence to support the complaint. Evidence may come in the form of knowledge of or participation in a conversation, written documentation, or other forms of veriﬁable information. Hearsay, conjecture, rumour and the like will not be accepted.422.2 The person making the complaint must disclose their name, and afﬁliation to a school (i.e. admin, coach, student etc.) to BCSS. However, they may choose whether their name shall be attached to the complaint publicly, or if they wish to remain anonymous.422.3 The Executive Director will review the complaint and determine whether the complaint warrants an investigation. The Executive Director may at his or her sole discretion, dismiss a complaint that:○ Is frivolous or made in bad faith;○ Does not contain the relevant required information to substantiate the complaint;○ Does not fall within the jurisdiction of BCSS.422.4 Where the Executive Director dismisses the complaint, he/she will inform the complainant that the matter has been dismissed.422.5 Where the Executive Director determines the allegation is worthy of investigation, he/she will inform the Principal of the respondent school that a complaint has been received, and a BCSS investigation is commencing.422.6 Where BCSS discovers information through their normal course of business that indicates recruiting, the Executive Director, upon review of the information, may initiate an investigation without a complaint being submitted.422.7 The Executive Director will conduct the investigation, and may make inquiries of any relevant party, including but not limited to, administrators, coaches, teachers, students, or parents.422.8 Where the respondent fails to respond to the inquiries of the investigation, or chooses not to respond in ten (10) business days to these inquiries, the Executive Director may proceed on the basis the complaint has been proven.422.9 Any information that is obtained that is not provided by the respondent school inquiries, shall be provided to the respondent school for review and response.423.0 DISCIPLINE FOR RECRUITING 423.1 Upon completion of the investigation, the Executive Director will provide a ruling to the Principal of the respondent school, summarizing the ﬁndings of the investigation and if applicable, any sanctions. Sanctions will be determined by the Executive Director and may include part, or all, but shall not be limited to:○ An ofﬁcial letter of reprimand○ A sanction or combination of sanctions, that may include, but are not limited to,• The student-athlete in question◦ Period of ineligibility (minimum 1-year)• The member school◦ Suspension or Expulsion from BCSS Membership◦ Fine to a Maximum of $3000• The member school athletic program◦ Suspension from zone or provincial play (team/sport speciﬁc, or school wide)◦ Mandatory Training for the AD or Administration• The speciﬁc team◦ Team ineligibility /Suspension of team◦ Forfeiture of games◦ Ban from post-season play◦ Reduction in maximum playing days in a season of play• The coach◦ Suspension from all coaching duties◦ Mandatory training

Page 59

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 59423.2 Once the ruling has been provided to the Administrator, the school will have ten (10) business days to appeal the ruling. The appeal must be made in writing and be addressed to the Executive Director. The appeal will be heard by a minimum of three (3) members of the Board of Directors. The appeal will be heard by video-conference or in person, at the discretion of the President or their designate.423.3 At the conclusion of the appeal, in their discretion, the Board may choose to:○ Remove all sanctions;○ Reduce or add sanctions;○ Take no action, leaving, the Executive Director’s ruling to stand.423.4 The decision of the Board of Directors is ﬁnal and binding on the parties and shall not be questioned or reviewed in any court or tribunal, and no order shall be made or process entered or proceeding taken in any court or tribunal whether by way of injunction, declaration, prohibition or otherwise to question, review, prohibit or restrain the proceedings. It is the intention of BCSS and its members that, to the extent permitted by law, all matters concerning its Competitive Rules and Regulations be private matters not subject to any form of adjudication by any court or tribunal.423.5 Where the Executive Director is unable to act under this section, his/her powers and duties may be exercised by a substitute as appointed by the President.430.0 HARASSMENT AND ABUSEBC School Sports does not condone any form of harassment or abusive behaviour on the part of any participant in BC School Sports programs, services and/or activities. BC School Sports is committed to providing an environment in which all individuals are treated with respect and dignity. Participants shall include any member school student-athlete, member school team coach, member school team manager, member school volunteer, recognized athletic association volunteer, BC School Sports volunteer, BC School Sports staff, spectator, ofﬁcial or event volunteer.431.0 THE ROLE OF BC SCHOOL SPORTSBCSS is committed to creating and maintaining a sport environment that is free from all forms of harassment and abuse for its members. BCSS will:431.1 Discourage and prevent harassment within BCSS.431.2 Provide assistance and guidance to individuals who experience harassment and pass the information into the appropriate organizations (Schools, School Districts or local police).431.3 Ensure all members and employees of BCSS are aware of the negative impacts of harassment and abuse and educate them of the procedures contained in this policy.431.4 Regularly review the terms of this policy to ensure that it meets BCSS’s objectives and legal obligations. 432.0 DEFINITIONS 432.1 Harassment is deﬁned as behaviour including comments, conduct or gestures which are insulting, intimidating, humiliating, hurtful, malicious, degrading or otherwise offensive to an individual or group of individuals or which creates an uncomfortable environment, or which might reasonably be expected to cause embarrassment, insecurity, discomfort, offense, or humiliation to another person or group, including but not limited to:○ Written or verbal abuse or threats;○ Physical assault;○ Unwelcome remarks, jokes, innuendos or taunting about a person’s body, sexual orientation, attire, age, marital status, ethnic or racial origin or religion;○ Displaying of sexually explicit, racist or other offensive or derogatory material, sexual, racial, ethnic or religious grafﬁti;○ Practical jokes which cause awkwardness or embarrassment, endangering a person’s safety or negatively affecting performance;○ Hazing or initiation rites;○ Leering or other suggestive or obscene gestures;○ Intimidation;○ Condescension, paternalism or patronizing behaviour which undermines self-respect or adversely affects performance or working conditions;○ Conduct, comments, gestures or contact of a sexual nature that is likely to cause offense or humiliation or that might, on reasonable grounds, be perceived as placing a condition of a sexual nature on employment or any

Page 60

60 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook opportunity for selection, training or advancement; and○ False accusations of harassment motivated by malice or mischief and meant to cause other harm, is considered harassment.432.2 Sexual harassment is deﬁned as behaviour involving one (1) or more incidents of unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favours or other verbal conduct of a sexual nature:○ When such conduct might reasonably be expected to cause embarrassment, insecurity, discomfort, offense or humiliation to another person or group;○ When submission to such conduct is made either implicitly or explicitly as a basis for making decisions which affect the individual;○ When submission to such conduct is made either implicitly or explicitly as a condition of employment;○ When submission to or rejection of such conduct is used as a basis for any decision of authority (including but not limited to matters of promotion, raise in salary, job security or beneﬁts, and or participation or inclusion on a team); and○ When such conduct has the purpose or the effect of interfering with an individual’s performance or creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive work or participation environment.432.3 Abuse and neglect are deﬁned as behaviour involving one (1) or more incidents of physical, emotional, or sexual mistreatment or lack of care which causes physical injury or emotional damage to a participant:○ When such conduct might reasonably be expected to cause harm, distress or injury to another person or group;○ When submission to such conduct is made either implicitly or explicitly as a basis for making decisions which affect the individual;○ When such conduct creates a culture of fear among student-athletes, coaches, parents, volunteers or staff;○ When such conduct encourages or forces a participant to engage in destructive or harmful activities433.0 ACCUSATIONS OF HARASSMENT433.1 BC School Sports encourages any individual who is subjected to any form of harassment to report such harassment to the appropriate public school district, public school, independent school, BC School Sports or provincial sport organization, as designated below (volunteer is deﬁned as an individual acting in their capacity of an event organizer, committee member, ofﬁcer, director or other BC School Sports-assigned task):433.1.1 Any incident of harassment or abuse, or accusation of harassment or abuse involving a student shall be referred to the applicable school district as per the particular school district’s policy, or independent school as per the particular non-public school policy;433.1.2 Any incident of harassment or abuse, or accusation of harassment or abuse involving an employee of a school district or independent school, when the employee is acting as a team coach, team sponsor, team chaperone, competition ofﬁcial or director of a local or regional athletic association, shall be referred to the applicable school district or independent school as per the particular school district’s or non-public school’s policy;433.1.3 Any incident of harassment or abuse, or accusation of harassment or abuse involving an individual who is acting in their capacity as a director of BC School Sports, an employee, or a volunteer shall be dealt with as per the BC School Sports harassment policy;433.1.4 Any incident of harassment or abuse, or accusation of harassment or abuse involving an individual who is a competition ofﬁcial at a BC School Sports sanctioned event shall also be referred to the provincial sport organization with whom the ofﬁcial is afﬁliated;433.1.5 In the event of an incident of harassment or abuse, or accusation of harassment or abuse where there is duplicate jurisdiction between a school district or independent school and BC School Sports, or a provincial sport organization and BC School Sports, the disciplinary jurisdiction of BC School Sports is limited to an individual’s involvement in BC School Sports programs and projects, including competitive involvement under the authority of a BC School Sports recognized athletic association. 433.1.6 BC School Sports shall name one (1) female and one (1) male BC School Sports Harassment Advisor who may be contacted for advice regarding any incident of harassment or accusation of harassment.434.0 PROCEDURES FOR ACCUSATIONS OF HARASSMENT AND/OR ABUSE 434.1 An individual who thinks that they have been subjected to conduct which constitutes harassment (see 432) is encouraged to make it known to the person responsible for this conduct that the behaviour is not welcome and is contrary to this policy.

Page 61

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 61 Any inquiry received by a BC School Sports Harassment Advisor will be dealt with as follows:434.1.1 If the Harassment Advisor and complainant agree that the conduct does not constitute harassment, then the Harassment Advisor will take no further action.434.1.2 Informal Resolution – The individuals involved will be invited to attempt an informal resolution with the BC School Sports Harassment Advisor mediating the meeting (i.e. conversation, conference call, meeting).434.1.3 A conﬁdential written summary report of the resolution telephone call or meeting will be sent to the administrator of the member school(s) involved, as well as to the complainant and respondent.434.1.4 Rights of the Complainant – If an informal resolution is not possible, the Harassment Advisor shall inform the complainant of:a) The right to make a formal written complaint,b) The availability of counseling and other resources,c) The right to be represented by another designated individual at any stage in the complaint process. Any costs incurred by the complainant due to their decision to be represented by another individual will be the responsibility of the complainant,d) Other avenues of recourse, including the right to ﬁle a complaint to the BC Human Right Tribunal, or, where appropriate, to contact the police where the conduct may have been offensive pursuant to the Criminal Code.e) The referral of a formal harassment complaint received by BC School Sports to a Harassment Ofﬁcer, as designated by Sport BC, for arms-length investigation. 434.2 FILING A FORMAL COMPLAINTIf the complainant wishes to ﬁle a formal complaint, the following steps will be followed:434.2.1 A written complaint will be ﬁled with a Harassment Advisor, with a copy going to the respondent and the administrator of the member school(s) involved.434.2.2 The Harassment Advisor will provide the respondent with a written copy of the BC School Sports Harassment Policy, including a request for a written response to the complaint within ten (10) school days of receiving the information, and the right to be represented at any stage of the process by a designated individual. Any costs incurred by the respondent due to their decision to be represented by another individual will be the responsibility of the respondent. 434.2.3 Within sixty (60) days of receiving the initial written complaint, the Harassment Advisor shall conduct an investigation and prepare a written report. The investigation will follow the process of natural justice.434.2.4 The investigative report from the Harassment Advisor will be submitted to the BC School Sports Executive Director, who shall:a) Make a determination as to whether the respondent has engaged in conduct constituting harassment; andb) If such determination is made, order such disciplinary action to be taken as is appropriate in the circumstances.435.0 DISCIPLINE FOR HARASSMENT 435.1 EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR DECISIONThe decision of the Executive Director will be made within ten (10) school days of receiving the report from the Harassment Ofﬁcer, and will be sent to the complainant, the respondent and to the administrator of the member school(s) involved. BC School Sports will also inform the BCTF and the Teacher Regulation Branch if the respondent is a member.435.2 APPEALING THE DECISIONThe decision of the Executive Director may be appealed, in writing, by either the complainant or the respondent, within ﬁfteen (15) school days of the original decision being rendered. The written appeal shall be directed to the BC School Sports Board of Directors.435.2.1 The Board of Directors will meet within ten (10) school days of receiving the written appeal.435.2.2 The Board of Directors shall review all of the information compiled in the investigation, and meet with both the complainant and the respondent regarding the reasons that the appeal was ﬁled. Meetings may be by conference call.435.2.3 The decision of the Board of Directors may be to:a) Overturn the decision of the Executive Director by eliminating any penalty;

Page 62

62 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbookb) Overturn the decision of the Executive Director by establishing a penalty; c) Overturn the decision of the Executive Director by increasing the penalty; d) Overturn the decision of the Executive Director by reducing the penalty; or e) Uphold the decision of the Executive Director. 435.2.4 The decision of the Board of Directors will be provided to the appellant within ten (10) days of completing their investigation. A copy of the decision will be sent to the complainant, the respondent and to the administrator of the member school(s) involved. BC School Sports will also inform the BCTF and the Teacher Regulation Branch if the respondent is a member.435.3 BINDING DECISIONThe decision of the Board of Directors is ﬁnal and binding on all parties.440.0 MEDIA AND SOCIAL MEDIAThe BCSS Media and Social Media Policy identiﬁes the standards of behaviour which is expected of all BCSS members and participants including but not limited to; student-athletes, parents, guardians, coaches, ofﬁcials, volunteers, spectators, teachers, BCSS staff and administrators involved in BCSS activities and events. BCSS is committed to providing an environment in which all individuals are treated with respect. It is understood that many schools, teams and individuals may have websites or social media accounts and may have access to media outlets. Social media accounts can include but are not limited to; Twitter, Instagram, Facebook, Snapchat, TikTok, YouTube, blogs, etc. Social media is a public domain which may be used to enhance opportunities in life and sport. The positive use of social media is acceptable and encouraged by BCSS. The following policies outline the BCSS Social Media Guidelines;441.0 IMAGE441.1 Content on social media shall portray a positive image of the participant, team, association and school. 441.2 All participants who have or moderate a social media account must conduct themselves in a positive manner that reﬂects as a healthy inﬂuence in their community.442.0 COMMUNICATION442.1 Social media may be used to promote BCSS activities or events (eg. Practices, games, tournaments etc.).442.2 Inappropriate comments, pictures, racial slurs, threats against teammates, ofﬁcials or opposing teams are prohibited. Social media may not be used to bully, harass or promote negative inﬂuences or criminal behaviour. 442.3 The posting of personal or conﬁdential information about a student-athlete, coach, ofﬁcial, staff member or volunteer is prohibited. 443.0 BEST PRACTICES ○ Ensure consent has been provided for any individuals appearing in content intended for public domain. ○ Include positive images and videos when possible. ○ Provide shareable, relevant, value-driven content that supports the success and participation of teams, coaches, student-athletes and ofﬁcials.○ Remember that sharing content online is permanent and is almost impossible to permanently remove from public domain.444.0 VIOLATIONSShould a violation(s) of the outlined guidelines occur they should be reported to BC School Sports and will be subject to an investigation. If a violation is found to have occurred, the participant(s) will be subject to disciplinary action under BCSS Bylaws.

Page 63

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 63510.0 ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING511.0 The Annual General Meeting (AGM) shall be held between February 1 and the ﬁnal day of school.512.0 Motions passed at the Annual General Meeting will come into effect on August 1st of that calendar year, unless otherwise stated in the motion. Eligibility related submissions for the next school year cannot be ruled on until new policies come into effect.513.0 Legislative Assembly Members will be reimbursed for eligible expenses in accordance with the following: 513.1 Board of Directors; will be reimbursed for meals, travel, accommodation, and TOC costs where required;513.2 Committee Chairs; will be reimbursed for meals, travel, accommodation, and TOC costs where required;513.3 Partner Organizations; will be provided accommodation; Meals that are provided as normal course of the meetings will be provided to all attendees. Those meals are ineligible for reimbursement.513.4 Zones will be provided with a travel subsidy based on their geographical location and the location of the meeting as outlined in 513.4.1. Zone travel subsidy allocation costs are based on 3 delegates travelling to attend the meeting. The amount provided will be pro-rated based on the number of delegates that attend.513.4.1 MEETING LOCATIONKootenay Thompson- OkanaganNorth CentralNorthwest Vancouver IslandEastern ValleySouth FraserFraser NorthVancouver Sea to SkyKootenay $150 $1,800 $2,400 $2,100 $2,100 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800Thompson- Okanagan$1,800 $150 $2,400 $1,800 $1,500 $1,200 $1,200 $1,200 $1,200North Central$2,400 $2,400 $150 $2,400 $2,100 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800Northwest $2,100 $1,800 $2,400 $150 $2,250 $1,950 $1,950 $1,950 $1,950Vancouver Island$2,100 $1,500 $2,700 $2,250 $150 $300 $300 $300 $300Eastern Valley$1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150South Fraser $1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150 Fraser North $1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150Vancouver Sea to Sky$1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150Total travel allocation cost$15,750 $12,450 $17,250 $16,500 $9,300 $7,650 $7,650 $7,650 $7,650** Zone travel allocation costs are based on 3 delegates attending the meeting. The amount will be prorated based on the number of eligible voting delegates that attend.520.0 ANNUAL PLANNING MEETING521.0 The BCSS Board of Directors will call an extraordinary meeting every fall to be known as the Annual Planning Meeting and shall be held between the ﬁrst day of school and winter break.522.0 Any motions passed at the Annual Planning Meeting will come into effect on August 1st of that year, unless otherwise stated in the motion. Eligibility Applications for the next school year cannot be ruled on until new policies come into effect.523.0 Legislative Assembly Members will be reimbursed for eligible expenses in accordance with section 533.0.523.1 Board of Directors; reimbursed for meals, travel, accommodation, and TOC costs where required;523.2 Committee Chairs; reimbursed for meals, travel, accommodation, and TOC costs where required;523.3 Partner Organizations; will be provided accommodation;

Page 64

64 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook Meals that are provided as normal course of the meetings will be provided to all attendees. Those meals are ineligible for reimbursement.523.4 Zones will be provided with a travel subsidy based on their geographical location and the location of the meeting as outlined in 523.4.1. Zone travel subsidy allocation costs are based on 3 delegates travelling to attend the meeting. The amount provided will be pro-rated based on the number of delegates that attend.523.4.1 MEETING LOCATIONKootenayThompson- OkanaganNorth CentralNorthwestVancouver IslandEastern ValleySouth FraserFraser NorthVancouver Sea to SkyKootenay $150 $1,800 $2,400 $2,100 $2,100 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800Thompson- Okanagan$1,800 $150 $2,400 $1,800 $1,500 $1,200 $1,200 $1,200 $1,200North Central$2,400 $2,400 $150 $2,400 $2,100 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800 $1,800Northwest $2,100 $1,800 $2,400 $150 $2,250 $1,950 $1,950 $1,950 $1,950Vancouver Island$2,100 $1,500 $2,700 $2,250 $150 $300 $300 $300 $300Eastern Valley$1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150South Fraser $1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150 Fraser North $1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150Vancouver Sea to Sky$1,800 $1,200 $1,800 $1,950 $300 $150 $150 $150 $150Total travel allocation cost$15,750 $12,450 $17,250 $16,500 $9,300 $7,650 $7,650 $7,650 $7,650** Zone travel allocation costs are based on 3 delegates attending the meeting. The amount will be prorated based on the number of eligible voting delegates that attend.530.0 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND CONFIDENTIALITYDeclaring afﬁliations provides the opportunity for members of a committee or legislative body to share their relationships, which may contribute or may be perceived to contribute to their opinions or positions. This ensures that members of the group are aware of other members’ afﬁliations.531.0 CONFLICT OF INTEREST All members of the BCSS Board, Legislative Assembly and Committees are required to disclose any personal, professional and close familial connections or associations within education, sport or related sectors. By acknowledging one’s afﬁliations, they are recognizing that while one may use the experience gained from these afﬁliations in your contributions, but that the participation and opinions shared are those of the group/seat one represents in the applicable BCSS Bylaws and Policies, or appropriate Committee Terms of Reference, and not sector afﬁliations you may hold. Beyond the required standard disclosure required, a member of the Board of Directors, Legislative Assembly or BCSS committee will declare themselves to be in conﬂict of interest when discussing or deliberating any topic in which there may be the perception that a relationship or beneﬁt may be impacting the deliberations or decision-making process, and speciﬁcally, but not limited to where:531.1 There is the potential for a personal beneﬁt, ﬁnancial or otherwise to be gained531.2 There is a close personal relationship between a member and someone or entity involved in the topic532.0 CONFIDENTIALITY The discussions, topics, deliberations and decisions made by any BCSS committee are considered conﬁdential in nature, and shall not be discussed, disclosed nor referred to outside of the meeting setting unless permitted by the BCSS President, BCSS Executive Director, or applicable BCSS Committee Chair.540.0 BCSS COMMITTEESThe Bylaws permit the BCSS Board of Directors or Legislative Assembly to create committees as required to perform the functions required of the organization. Committees may be policy committees, operating committees, or ad-hoc committees. As per the Bylaws, committees approved by the Legislative Assembly must have a Terms of Reference. The BCSS President and Executive Director shall sit as ex-ofﬁcio members of all committees, unless otherwise noted speciﬁcally in the Terms of Reference.

Page 65

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 65POLICY COMMITTEESPolicy committees are part of the governing process. The Chair of each Policy Committee receives a seat on the Legislative Assembly and the role of the committee is to make recommendations to the Legislative Assembly about changes to policy relative to their scope and mandate.541.0 COMPETITIVE FAIRNESS COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo make policy recommendations to the Legislative Assembly on all issues related to BC School Sports as it pertains to the goal of the maintaining competitive fairness and equity in an effort to provide equitable opportunity for success amongst all member schools.MANDATEThe Competitive Fairness Committee shall solicit feedback, engage in research and discussion with internal and external stakeholders with the goal of making informed recommendations to the membership. Areas of focus should include, but are not limited to:○ The differences of rural versus urban schools○ Independent schools versus public schools ○ The effect of international students or boarding students on competitive balance○ BCSS tiering structures and philosophy○ Any other policy or absence of a policy that has an impact on the ability for all schools to have an equitable opportunity to succeed COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe Competitive Fairness Committee will consist of fourteen (14) members as appointed by the Board of Directors on the recommendation of the Executive Director. With the exception of those appointed by way of their position, all members will serve terms of 3-years. Members may serve up to two consecutive terms. ○ Chairperson○ BCSS Board Member○ BCSS Executive Director*○ ISABC Executive Director*○ School District Administrator○ Head/Deputy Head from ISABC Member School○ Public School Administrator○ Athletic Director from non-ISABC Independent School○ Athletic Director from ISABC Independent School○ Athletic Director from a A/AA Public School○ Athletic Director from a AAA/AAA Public School○ Team Sport SAC Chair○ Individual Sport SAC Chair○ District Athletic Coordinator*designates are appointed to the committee by way of their positionCOMMITTEE MEETINGS:The CFC meetings will be held a minimum of four times per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meeting will be held by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. Quorum for meetings is the majority of the committee members as appointed.The Chair, with support from the BCSS Staff Liaison shall distribute an Agenda prior to the meeting. Minutes shall be recorded and provided to the BCSS ofﬁce for review and publication.Where the Chair is unable to lead a meeting, the members may select a representative from the committee to chair the meeting.BCSS will provide a staff liaison to work with the chair and committee membership.

Page 66

66 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookAUTHORITYThe Competitive Fairness committee, by way of a simple majority vote, can bring motions for consideration by the Legislative Assembly. A majority vote of the committee in favour does not change BCSS policy.REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.542.0 ELIGIBILITY APPEALS COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – StandingCommittee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo adjudicate the appeals of the decisions of the Eligibility Ofﬁcer(s) concerning a student-athlete’s eligibility in accordance with eligibility and transfer rules.MANDATEThe EAC shall read, understand, discuss and evaluate each appeal on an individual basis. The committee shall then consider the information in the application and shall approve or deny the appeal, having regard to the purposes, bylaws, and policies of BC School Sports. The committee is granted the authority to grant exceptions to the policies of the organization as it pertains to student-athlete eligibility, generally, but not limited to, on the grounds of extraordinary and/or compassionate grounds. The Committee shall issue a ruling to the applicant school either approving or denying the appeal and containing a brief summary of the reasons for their decisions. The decisions of the EAC are ﬁnal and binding and shall not be questioned or reviewed in any court or tribunal.COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe EAC chairperson will be appointed by the board and must be a school or district administrator. The Chair is a voting member of the. Legislative Assembly, but generally will be used as a tie-breaking vote when required. Should the EAC Chair be unable to attend a meeting or declares a conﬂict of interest with a particular appeal, the Chair may designate another member of the EAC to chair the meeting or portion thereof. The individual assuming the position of chairperson assumes the tie-breaking voting role while in the chair. The designated Chair does not need to be an administrator.The EAC will consist of seven (7) members as appointed by the Board of Directors, each for a four-year term, which can be renewed once consecutively. All members must be employed by a member school or school district. A minimum of two (2) committee members must be school or district administrators. COMMITTEE MEETINGSThe EAC will meet as set by the BCSS Board of Directors in the BCSS calendar; up to a maximum of 10 meetings per year. The EAC may meet by conference call or video conferencing if warranted by time and expense. The manner in which the EAC will meet is the decision of the chairperson of the EAC. A minimum of 50% of all appointed members of the EAC must be in attendance in order that appeals can be heard. Meeting minutes will be recorded to provide a record of the decisions of the EAC including their rationale and context for their decisions. These minutes will be provided to BCSS.Unless requested speciﬁcally by the Chair, neither the President nor the Executive Director will not attend the EAC meetings. The committee will note other policy or procedures as noted in the applicable eligibility section of the BCSS handbook. AUTHORITYThe EAC will by majority vote, determine the outcome of Eligibility appeals. These decisions are ﬁnal and binding The EAC, at their discretion, may make exceptions to BCSS Eligibility policies on the basis of extraordinary or compassionate grounds.REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.543.0 SPORTS CHAMPIONSHIP COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of Directors These terms of reference apply to the following two (2) separate committees:

Page 67

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 67○ Team Sports Championship Committee ○ Individual Sports Championship CommitteePURPOSEThrough comprehensive research and discussion, examine policy related to BCSS Championships, and make recommendations to the Legislative Assembly ensuring a common review process and shared multi-sport philosophy amongst championships. MANDATEEvaluate BCSS policy related to championships such as, but not limited to: ○ Size of Championships (Number of participating teams and/or athletes)○ Structure of Championships (Round Robin, Power Pools, Crossover, Double Elimination etc.) ○ Berthing (Process for awarding championship berths)○ Seeding and Ranking Process and Procedures (process for determining Championship seeding)○ Discipline and Appeal Policies for Zone and Provincial Championship contests○ Host Rotations and ResponsibilitiesCOMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTEach Championship Committee will be chaired by a person who is elected by the Legislative Assembly. The chair must be an Athletic Director or Administrator at a Member School or School District; a current or past BCSS Zone President; a current or past Local Association President; or a District Athletic Coordinator. The Term of the Chair is 3 years. The Chair, by virtue of their election is also a member of the Legislative Assembly. Each sport in the appropriate committee will be represented by one individual who is appointed by the Sport Advisory Committee for their sport. The term for the SAC Appointed Members is 2 years. The SAC appointee must be employed by a member school or school district. The sports represented in each committee are as follows:○ Individual Sport Committee: Aquatics, Cross-Country, Mountain Biking, Snowboarding, Track & Field, Wrestling○ Team Sport Championship Committee: Badminton, Basketball, Curling, Field Hockey, Football, Golf, Rugby, Soccer, Tennis, Ultimate, VolleyballCOMMITTEE MEETINGSEach Committee will meet at minimum three times per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be held by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. The Chair, with support from the BCSS Staff Liaison shall distribute an Agenda prior to the meeting. Minutes shall be recorded, and provided to the BCSS ofﬁce for review and publication.The committee will require a minimum of 50% of appointed members to constitute quorum.Where the Chair is unable to lead a meeting, the members may select a representative from the committee to chair the meeting. BCSS will provide a staff liaison to work with the chair and committee membership. AUTHORITYThe Championship committee, by way of a simple majority vote, can bring motions for consideration by the Legislative Assembly. A majority vote in favour does not change BCSS policy. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.544.0 SPORT MEDICINE AND ATHLETE SAFETY COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo examine all issues related to athlete safety of participants in school sports and make policy recommendations to the legislative assembly accordingly.

Page 68

68 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookMANDATESport Medicine & Athlete Safety Committee (SMASC) is a committee appointed by and responsible to the Board of Directors that shall solicit feedback, engage in research and discussion with internal and external stakeholders with the goal of making informed recommendations to the Legislative Assembly. Areas of focus should include, but are not limited to:○ Safety standards and risk management for school sport events○ Concussion education and return to education and return to play protocols○ Injury statistics and trend identiﬁcation○ Research opportunities, best practices education related to overuse, sport specialization, and any other policy or absence of a policy that has the ability to increase student-athlete safety and well beingCOMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe Sport Medicine & Athlete Safety Committee will consist of minimum of 7 members, up to a maximum of 12 members as appointed by the Board of Directors on the recommendation of the Executive Director with thought towards achieving the appropriate diversity and knowledge on the committee.The committee will be required to have: ○ Committee Chair○ Football Representative○ Rugby Representative○ BCSS Board of Director○ External – Athletic Therapist ○ External – Sport Medicine Physician○ External – Concussion Expert○ Others that may provide leadership or expertise in the area of school sport, sport medicine, mental wellness, or related area to support the work of the committee. COMMITTEE MEETINGSThe Sport Medicine and Athlete Safety committee meetings will meet a minimum of three times per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be held by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. The Chair, with support from the BCSS Staff Liaison shall distribute an Agenda prior to the meeting. Minutes shall be recorded, and provided to the BCSS ofﬁce for review and publication.The committee will require a minimum of 50% of appointed members to constitute quorum.Where the Chair is unable to lead a meeting, the members may select a representative from the committee to chair the meeting. BCSS will provide a staff liaison to work with the chair and committee membership. AD-HOC OR SUB-COMMITTEE:The SMASC can at the discretion of the chair, form a sub- or ad-hoc committee to address issues requiring speciﬁc expertise and may recruit members from the school sport or medical/safety community at large, if necessary. There must be at least two committee members appointed to a sub- or ad-hoc committee. The committee should be task-speciﬁc, time-limited and is dissolved once the recommendations are moved forward. AUTHORITYThe Sport Medicine and Athlete Safety Committee, by way of a simple majority vote, can bring motions for consideration by the Legislative Assembly. A majority vote in favour does not change BCSS policy. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.545.0 SPORTS RULES COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsThese terms of reference apply to the following three (3) separate committees: ○ Fall Sports Rules Committee

Page 69

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 69○ Winter Sports Rules Committee○ Spring Sports Rules CommitteePURPOSETo examine all issues related to athlete rules for the sports within their season of play and make policy recommendations to the Legislative Assembly accordingly.MANDATEEach committee is focused on the rules of play for the sports in their season of play including:○ Technical Rules and Game Protocols ○ Field of Play Speciﬁcations/Requirements○ Uniforms ○ Equipment○ Ofﬁcials/ScoringCOMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTEach Sport Rules Committee will be chaired by a person who is elected by the Legislative Assembly. The chair must be an Athletic Director or Administrator at a Member School or School District; a current or past BCSS Zone President; a current or past Local Association President; or a District Athletic Coordinator. The Term of the Chair is 3 years. The Chair, by virtue of their election is also a member of the Legislative Assembly. Each Sports Rules Committee will have one female and one male expert from each sport that are appointed by the Sport Advisory Committee (SAC). The term for the Sports Rules Committee is 2 years. The SRC appointee must be employed by a member school or school district.COMMITTEE MEETINGSEach Committee will meet at minimum two times per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be held by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. The Chair, with support from the BCSS Staff Liaison shall distribute an Agenda prior to the meeting. Minutes shall be recorded, and provided to the BCSS ofﬁce for review and publication.The committee will require a minimum of 50% of appointed members to constitute quorum. Where the Chair is unable to lead a meeting, the members may select a representative from the committee to chair the meeting. BCSS will provide a staff liaison to work with the chair and committee membership. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.546.0 TIERING & SPORT EVALUATION COMMITTEE Committee Type: Policy – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo thoroughly research and make recommendations to the Legislative Assembly related to issues of Tiering and Sport Evaluation.MANDATEThe Tiering and Sport Evaluation (TSE) Committee will make recommendations to the Legislative Assembly on tiering thresholds, structures and timelines. This committee is responsible to make recommendations for the addition and removal of sports based on established criteria and data. The committee will create and evaluate the application process for adding new sports.COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe TSE membership will consist of the following members: ○ BCSS Board of Directors Member (Chair)

Page 70

70 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook○ Team Sport Championship Committee Member○ Individual Sport Championship Committee Member○ BC Schools Superintendent Association Representative○ BC Principals and Vice Principals Association Representative○ BCSS Executive DirectorThe Chair will be appointed from the Board of Directors for a period. While one representative from each of the Team Sport and Individual Sport Championship Committees will also be appointed by the Board. Each of these members will serve a 2-year term, renewable no more than 3 consecutive terms. The BCSSAA and BCPVPA representative will be appointed as a result of their organization’s appointment to the Legislative Assembly and their term will be for the duration of the appointment to the BCSS Legislative Assembly. COMMITTEE MEETINGSThe TSE will meet a minimum of two times per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be conducted by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. The Chair, with support from the BCSS Staff Liaison shall distribute an Agenda prior to the meeting. Minutes shall be recorded, and provided to the BCSS ofﬁce for review and publication. The committee will require a minimum of 50% of appointed members to constitute quorum. Where the Chair is unable to lead a meeting, the members may select a representative from the committee to chair the meeting. BCSS will provide a staff liaison to work with the chair and committee membership. AUTHORITYThe Tiering & Sport Evaluation committee, by way of a simple majority vote, can bring motions for consideration by the Legislative Assembly. A majority vote in favour does not change BCSS policy. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.OPERATING COMMITTEESOperating committees are created to assist the staff in providing a critical service, program or deliverable to the membership. They are not part of the legislative process, but may provide feedback relevant to policy changes were required. 547.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOST COMMITTEES Committee Type: Operational Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo lead in the planning and delivery of BCSS Championships consistent with BCSS policy to create quality and memorable events for student-athletes. There will be 25-35 host committees each year for each BCSS championship event.MANDATEEach BCSS Championship is slightly different in nature, however, generally speaking every championship will have a committee responsible for the following:Planning and Delivering the BCSS Provincial Championships in a manner consistent with BCSS policy○ Developing the Championship Schedule○ Liaising and providing appropriate services for ofﬁcials ○ Working with technical ofﬁcials and BCSS ofﬁce staff ○ Facilitate livestreaming (where applicable) ○ Program design and printing (where applicable)○ Ticket sales, crowd control and safety measures○ Communication with and hospitality of coaches and VIPs○ Obtaining local sponsorship○ Sourcing and providing the required volunteers○ Facility Planning

Page 71

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 71○ Emergency Action Plan ○ Support Apparel Sales (where applicable)○ Post Event Report COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTComposition will vary based on the requirements of each event. Some championships may only have a committee of 5-7, while others may have a committee of 15-20. In general, each championship will have a person or persons responsible for these key areas, but may more areas they assign to committee members:○ Tournament Chair (or co-chairs)○ Media and Communications○ Ofﬁcials/Minor Ofﬁcials○ Sponsorship○ Accreditation, Logistics and HospitalityThe term is for the duration of the period leading up to and during the event. After the ﬁnal report is submitted, the committee is dissolved. There is no requirement for committee members or the chair to be an employee of a member school or district.AUTHORITYThe championship host committees do not have a legislative function but are essential in hosting provincial championship and providing feedback and ideas to the appropriate legislative committees.REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.548.0 HISTORY & ARCHIVES COMMITTEE Committee Type: Operational – Standing Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSETo ensure that BCSS events of historical signiﬁcance, sport, organizational, and individual, are documented, preserved and archived in an appropriate way so that they can be found and appropriately celebrated.MANDATE○ Provide a framework, system and method for tracking and archiving championship history such as tournament results, tournament locations, team and individual records○ Provide a framework, system and method to document and archive organizational history and decisions or periods of signiﬁcance such as major changes to organizational structure or philosophy, the addition or removal of sports, key volunteers, government relations, donors, logos and other visual representations of the organization, or any other item the committee feels is of historical signiﬁcance.• Provide a framework, system and method for capturing and archiving useful data captured by BCSS for historical comparisons. • Assist staff in developing, and maintaining record books and other useful documents or projects to celebrate the history and achievements of member schools and individuals.COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe committee will have a chair as appointed by the Board of Directors, at the recommendation of the Executive Director. The committee will consist of 6-15 members. This committee is open to anyone interested and may be of particular interest to retired teachers or coaches. Terms shall be 3 years in length, with no cap on the number of terms served by any individual. The committee will have a staff liaison to assist its work. COMMITTEE MEETINGSThe committee will meet a minimum of two times per year and may do so more at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be held by video conference. The committee, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee. REMUNERATION

Page 72

72 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookREMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.549.0 RANKING COMMITTEE Committee Type: Operational Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsThese terms of reference apply to the sports that currently use rankings (Football, Boys Volleyball, Girls Volleyball, Boys Basketball and Girls Basketball) and will also apply to any sports that subsequently add a ranking process.PURPOSEIn the sports that use weekly or bi-weekly rankings as a way to generate interest in the season as well as create a small foundation for which eventual Championship Seeding can be based.MANDATEEach committee would execute the ranking process which would be stewarded by BCSS staff on a weekly or biweekly basis, with the coaches on the committee submitting their rankings in an approved method to be consolidated by BCSS for publication.COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTEach committee will have a chair which will be appointed by the Board of Directors based on an expression of interest. Ranking committees would consist of an active coach from each BCSS Zone. There is no requirement that the coach is an employee of a member school or district. Where reasonable there may be subcommittees for the different tiers within a sport. COMMITTEE MEETINGSEach committee will meet virtually on a need to basis leading up to provincial championships. AUTHORITYThe committee has no legislative function but is essential in providing feedback and ideas to the appropriate legislative committee. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.550.0 SCHOLARSHIP COMMITTEECommittee Type: Operational - StandingCommittee Ownership: Board of DirectorsPURPOSEResponsible for reviewing and selecting all BCSS Scholarship recipients against the set criteria. MANDATEThe Scholarship Committee shall read, discuss and evaluate each scholarship application and select the most worthy candidates based on the pre-determined criteria set by the BCSS staff and/or donor/sponsor. COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe committee is made up of one representative from each of the nine (9) BCSS zones who are appointed by their respective Zone Executive. All representatives must be employed by a member school or school district. Each committee member will serve a one-year term. If a zone fails to put forward a representative, that zone will not be eligible to receive a scholarship.The committee chair will be appointed by the BCSS Board of Directors.BCSS will provide a staff liaison to assist the chair and committee in executing their duties. COMMITTEE MEETINGSThe committee will meet virtually on a need to basis. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.

Page 73

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 73551.0 SPORT ADVISORY COMMITTEE Committee Type: Operational Committee Ownership: Board of DirectorsEach BCSS Sport will have a Sport Advisory Committee. Due to the nature of Football not being contested at the zone level the committee composition will not be derived from the zones. These terms of reference apply to all sports with the exception of those that have alternative Terms of Reference speciﬁc to their sport.PURPOSETo provide a forum for sport speciﬁc dialogue and providing support for the continued growth and development of our coaches and sports.MANDATE○ Appointing the two (2) representatives for their sport to the appropriate rules committee ○ Providing sport speciﬁc feedback on championships, rules, and other sport speciﬁc matters of importance to the coaches and student-athletes ○ Working with BCSS staff to coordinate and deliver workshops, courses, and other development and networking opportunities for coaches around the province ○ Assist the BCSS staff with the securing and requesting of ofﬁcials CHAIR○ The Chair is appointed by the Board of Directors, upon submission of an expression of interest○ The Chair serves a term of 3 years, with terms being staggered amongst other SAC Chairs○ The Chair represents their sport on the applicable BCSS Policy Championship Committee (Individual or Team)○ The Chair is required to be an educator employed by a member school or school districtCOMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENT○ In addition to the Chair, each BCSS zone will appoint one person to each BCSS Sport Advisory Committee, for a total of 10 members of each committee.○ Each BCSS zone should, where possible, appoint their zone lead for that sport○ Each zone appointee will serve for a period of 1 year○ There is no limit on the number of terms a zone appointed SAC member may serve○ Zone appointed SAC members are NOT required to be educators, but should be active coaches in the applicable sportCOMMITTEE MEETINGSEach Committee will meet a least once per year. Additional meetings can be called at the discretion of the Chair. Meetings will be held by video conference. The Chair, with approval from the Executive Director, may request an in-person meeting for the members of the committee.AUTHORITYThe committee has no legislative function but is essential in providing feedback and ideas to the appropriate legislative committee. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors.552.0 FOOTBALL SPORT ADVISORY COMMITTEE Committee Type: Operational - Standing Committee Owner: Board of DirectorsPURPOSEAs football is run provincially and does not follow the zone model as all other BCSS sports do, the Football SAC provides operational expertise to deliver the football season from the regular season through to the Championship. Additionally, it provides a forum for Football speciﬁc dialogue and providing support for the continued growth and development of our coaches and the sport.

Page 74

74 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookMANDATE○ Working in collaboration with the BCSS Staff, operationalize the Football season, for things such as, but not limited to, scheduling, ofﬁcials’ coordination, event sponsorship, coach training, safety certiﬁcations, HUDL, website etc. ○ Appoint the two (2) football representatives to the Fall Sports Rules Committee ○ Appoint the one (1) football representative to the Team Sports Championship Committee ○ Solicit sport-speciﬁc feedback from coaches and other stakeholders on championships, rules, and other sport- speciﬁc matters as a conduit to BCSS, the Board of Directors, policy committees and Legislative Assembly. ○ Work in collaboration with BCSS staff to coordinate and deliver workshops, courses, and other development and networking opportunities for coaches around the province COMPOSITION & TERM OF APPOINTMENTThe Football SAC chair will be appointed by the Board of Directors, upon the submission of an expression of interest. All other committee members will be named by the Board of Directors at the recommendation of the Chairperson and the Executive Director. Committee members are NOT required to be employed by a school or school district. • Chairperson• AAA Conference Coordinator• AA Conference Coordinator• Junior Football Coordinator• Grade 8 Football Coordinator• Interior Representative• Northern Representative• Island Representative• HUDL Coordinator• Discipline Coordinator• Communications Coordinator• Championship Director• Safety Coordinator• Coach Education & Development CoordinatorCOMMITTEE MEETINGSDue to the operational nature of this committee, the committee will meet monthly leading up to and during the season of play, and then as required, at the discretion of the Chair during the rest of the year. AUTHORITYThe committee has no legislative function and may not change BCSS policy but will work in tandem with BCSS staff to solve operational issues that arise. Additionally, they will provide sport-speciﬁc guidance and feedback to the legislative process regarding their sport. REMUNERATIONCommittee members shall receive no remuneration for serving as committee members, but are entitled, to be reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred during the exercise of their duties as approved by the Board of Directors. Members of the committee may receive a Contract for Service to perform speciﬁc duties as required time-to-time by BCSS.

Page 75

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 75610.0 BC SCHOOL SPORTS OFFICIAL ACTIVITIES611.0 BC School Sports recognizes and therefore governs the following as BCSS interscholastic activities. Activities are categorized as team or individual and are contested in their designated seasons of play:BCSS ACTIVITIESSEASON TEAM INDIVIDUALFALLFOOTBALL AQUATICSFIELD HOCKEY CROSS COUNTRYBOYS SOCCERVOLLEYBALLWINTERBASKETBALL WRESTLINGCURLINGSKIINGSNOWBOARDINGSPRINGBADMINTON MOUNTAIN BIKINGGOLF TRACK AND FIELDGIRLS SOCCERRUGBY XV’S & 7'STENNISULTIMATE612.0 GOALS OF ACTIVITY SELECTION To promote and maintain activities which enhance the educational experience, and are appropriate to the school system, based on coaching, facilities, and technical resources available. 613.0 NATIONAL CHAMPIONSHIPS BCSS, in conjunction with other member associations, support the School Sport Canada Statement on National Championships, and therefore no events of this nature will be sanctioned by BCSS. 620.0 SEASONS OF PLAYThe rules in this section are aimed at balancing interscholastic sport activity throughout the school year and fostering a balance for student-athletes between interscholastic sports and other activities. The intent of establishing seasons of play is to provide parameters as to when particular BCSS sanctioned competitions may occur. Within a season of play a member school’s coaches and administrators are encouraged to cooperate in scheduling matters and facility and resource use to maximize opportunities for student-athletes. 621.0 The season of play begins on the date listed in each sport section in section 1000. The season of play will end on the last day of the provincial championship for the sport in question.622.0 Member schools may only participate in ofﬁcial BCSS activities during the designated season of play as outlined in 611.0. Exceptions to this rule are noted in 647.0 – 648.0.623.0 No member school shall participate in scrimmages (deﬁnitions) outside the designated seasons of play.624.0 PLAYING OUTSIDE THE SEASON OF PLAY BCSS member schools may only compete in a BCSS activity against other member schools within the designated season of play. BCSS recognizes some students will wish to continue to play their sport outside the school season of play. To do this, the student-athletes must compete on a club/community team. Ideally, club/community teams are an aggregate of players from the community and not identical to the school team. A club/community team may not:624.1 Wear school uniforms, colours or apparel624.2 Use the school name or mascot name624.3 Use school transportation624.4 Require a student to play on the club/community team to be a member of the school team624.5 Advertise or promote the club/community program on school social media channels

Page 76

76 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook625.0 In addition to the above, the club/community team must:625.1 Be a member of the Provincial Sport Organization (PSO)625.2 If accessing school facilities, receive acknowledgement from the school administrator that the team is a club/ community team and therefore is not a recognized school activity625.3 Have a rental agreement for school gym time as a third party and the appropriate insurance. The rental costs may be reduced at the discretion of the school district or school.626.0 With approval from the BCSS Board of Directors, an afﬁliated local association may alter the Grade eight (8) and grade nine (9) seasons of play.627.0 SEASON OF PLAY INFRACTION PROCEDURES AND PENALTIES Infractions may be in violation of but are not limited to; playing outside of season of play, or exceeding the number of play days. Upon discovery of a Season of Play infraction, the Executive Director shall not make a determination without ﬁrst giving the member school notice of the allegation and the opportunity to be heard concerning the allegation.627.1 A member school shall submit promptly such information or documentation as may be required by the Executive Director for the purpose of making a determination under section 620.0627.2 Following communication with the member school in question, through a written summary of the reasons for the determination, it is at the discretion of the Executive Director to enforce; 627.3 The school in violation will be subject to penalties at the discretion of the Executive Director. Penalties may include but are not limited to, reduction in overall allowable playing days, forfeiture, suspension, disqualiﬁcation from post-season play and/or monetary ﬁnes. Fines against the member school will be calculated as follows and payable within thirty (30) school days of a written determination notice being made by the Executive Director:627.3.1 a minimum of $300 if no violation of this section by the school in the past three (3) years;627.3.2 a minimum of $500 if one (1) violation of this section by the school in the past ﬁve (5) years; or627.3.3 a minimum $1000, to a maximum of $3000 if more than one (1) violation of this section by the school in the past ﬁve (5) years.627.4 There is no appeal from a determination under this section. A determination is ﬁnal and binding and shall not be questioned or reviewed in any court or tribunal, and no order shall be made or process entered or proceeding taken in any court or tribunal whether by way of injunction, declaration, prohibition or otherwise to question, review, prohibit or restrain the proceedings. It is the intention of BCSS and its members that, to the extent permitted by law, all matters concerning its Bylaws and Policies be private matters not subject to any form of adjudication by any court or tribunal.630.0 SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND TIERING CLASSIFICATIONS631.0 ESTABLISHING SCHOOL ENROLLMENT NUMBERS To determine sport tiering classiﬁcations, member school population numbers will be calculated using the previous year’s grade ten (10), grade eleven (11), and Secondary Ungraded (SU) numbers as submitted September 30th to the Ministry of Education on the 1701 report. 632.0 SCHOOL ENROLLMENT APPEALS School enrollment appeals can be submitted to BCSS until October 1st of the current school year. Accepted appeals will determine the member schools enrollment numbers for all sports for a one (1) year period.632.1 Appeals can be submitted for the following:○ Addition or deletion of grades in a member school;○ School/District Re-organization; or○ Changes in enrolment in excess of ﬁve percent (5%) of the current year’s grade eleven (11) and grade twelve (12) (senior grades) students in a member school compared to the previous year’s 1701632.2 Appeals will not be accepted for the following:○ Changes or reclassiﬁcation of secondary ungraded students in a member school; or○ Generalized ﬂuctuation of less than ﬁve percent (5%) of the current year’s grade eleven (11) and grade twelve (12) (senior grades) students in a member school633.0 SPORT SPECIFIC REQUESTS FOR CHANGE OF TIERING: Schools wishing to compete in a different tier are to submit a tiering classiﬁcation change application no later than 7 days prior to the team registration deadline. The application is to be completed on the appropriate form and include a rationale

Page 77

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 77 for the tiering change, Athletic Directors and Principals are encouraged to get input from coaches prior to submitting the application to the Executive Director. When making a ruling on completed applications the Executive Director will consider factors that could be competitive disadvantages or prohibit sustainability and participation in sport as well as historical win percentage. Factors considered could include;○ Circumstances where climate or remoteness signiﬁcantly affects the length of the season and the number of inter-school events;○ Circumstances where schools are either initiating a new program or reactivating one after having been out of competition for a period of time;○ Extenuating circumstances at the discretion of the Executive Director.633.1 Applications for tiering classiﬁcation changes are not intended for teams to increase likelihood for a provincial berth, but to encourage the sustainability and longevity of developing teams during league play competition. Executive Director Rulings are only valid for the current school year. 634.0 SPORT TIERING LEVELS Sport Tiering levels are used to determine the number of tiers (A, AA, AAA, AAAA) allocated to each ofﬁcial activity, and are decided based on two (2) main criteria;634.1 The required number of teams participating in the respective sport634.2 The number of BCSS Zones with eligible registered teams 635.0 Should a sport fall below the minimum number of actively participating schools as outline in the chart below for three (3) consecutive years, the sport tiering level will be reviewed and reclassiﬁed as an invitational event by the Tiering and Sport Evaluation Committee.635.1 Sport Level Classiﬁcations SPORT LEVEL REQUIRED # OF SCHOOLS # OF ZONES WITH TEAMS # OF TIERSIV 200 8 4III 150 8 3II 100 7 2I 50 6 1636.0 SPORT SPECIFIC TIERING CYCLES Boys Basketball Tiering will be reviewed biennially (every second year) with the second year of the current cycle in the 2025-2026 school year. 636.1 School enrollment numbers used for boys basketball tiering will be established as per BCSS policy 631.0.636.2 Member Schools are provided the opportunity to submit a "Playing In a Different Tier Form". Athletic Directors can request the play up form from the BCSS ofﬁce and submit prior to the noted deadlines.636.3 In order to maintain equal tier sizing, if a team moves to a higher tier, the bottom school in that tier, as well as the tiers below will be moved down to a lower tier. * Ex. If a school on the AA tier list moves up to the AAA tier, the school at the bottom of the 3A tier will be moved down to the 2A tier which would subsequently bump the team at the bottom of the AA list down to the A tier*636.4 After adjudicating the Applications to Play in a Different Tier the ﬁnalized Boys Basketball Tiering List will be sent out to all schools. This list is ﬁnal, and will not have any changes until the next tiering cycle.

Page 78

78 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook637.0 SPORT TIERING CLASSIFICATIONSAquatics (Coed)AAA - 421 or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 126-420 students in grades 11 and 12A - 125 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12Basketball (Boys)AAAA - 288 or more boys in grades 11 and 12AAA - 174-287 boys in grades 11 and 12AA - 60-173 boys in grades 11 and 12A - 59 or fewer boys in grades 11 and 12Basketball (Girls)AAAA - 263 or more girls in grades 11 and 12AAA - 163-262 girls in grades 11 and 12AA - 79-162 girls in grades 11 and 12A - 78 or fewer girls in grades 11 and 12Cross CountryAAA - 401+ or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 126-400 or more students in grades 11 and 12A - 125 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12Field Hockey (Girls)AAA - 251 or more girls in grades 11 and 12AA - 250 or fewer girls in grades 11 and 12FootballAAA - 275 or more boys in grades 11 and 12AA - 274 or fewer boys in grades 11 and 12Golf (Open)AAA - 361 or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 161-360 students in grades 11 and 12A - 160 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12Rugby (Boys)AAA - 276 or more boys in grades 11 and 12AA - 275 or fewer boys in grades 11 and 12Rugby (Girls)AAA - 276 or more girls in grades 11 and 12AA - 275 or fewer girls in grades 11 and 12Soccer (Boys)AAA - 226 or more boys in grades 11 and 12AA - 81-225 boys in grades 11 and 12A - 80 or fewer boys in grades 11 and 12Soccer (Girls)AAA - 226 or more girls in grades 11 and 12AA - 81-225 girls in grades 11 and 12A - 80 or fewer girls in grades 11 and 12Tennis (Boys and Girls)AAA - 501 or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 500 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12*Tiering numbers will be revised at the 2024 APM to reﬂect moving to genderedchampionships.Track and Field (Boys and Girls) AAA - 401 or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 400 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12Ultimate (Coed)AAA - 301 or more students in grades 11 and 12AA - 300 or fewer students in grades 11 and 12

Page 79

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 79Volleyball (Boys)AAA - 226 or more boys in grades 11 and 12AA - 81-225 boys in grades 11 and 12A - 80 or fewer boys in grades 11 and 12Volleyball (Girls)AAAA - 251 or more girls in grades 11 and 12AAA - 161-250 girls in grades 11 and 12AA - 66-160 girls in grades 11 and 12A - 65 or fewer girls in grades 11 and 12640.0 SANCTIONING The intent of sanctioning is to ensure school teams, playing under similar conditions and rules structures are competing fairly against one another, within the spirit and intent of interscholastic athletics. Any competition hosted by and contested between two BCSS member schools, in a recognized activity, during the season of play, is automatically sanctioned. Events that are held out of province, have out of province team(s) participating, or are hosted by a non-member institution, are required to obtain sanctioning prior to the event.641.0 To ensure that competition is conducted and/or approved by secondary school authorities and that competition is equitable and fair, sanctioning policies have been developed by all provincial school sport associations in Canada and state associations in the U.S.A. Sanctioning assures that competition is being conducted in the best interests of the schools concerned. The competition must be conducted by an educational institution or subject to the controls of school authorities. The following procedures must be used for sanctioning of competition involving schools from outside the province, member schools travelling to competition outside the province, and non-member or third party institution hosting high school events.642.0 DETERMINING THE HOSTThe event host is determined by BCSS and considers the following factors; recipient of entry fees, location of event, and management of the draw and/or tournament operations. 643.0 MEMBER SCHOOLS HOSTING COMPETITION WITH PARTICIPANTS FROM OUTSIDE BC 643.1 Any member schools hosting team(s) from out of province must obtain sanctioning from BCSS by submitting the appropriate form.643.2 All hosting application forms must be submitted to BCSS no later than thirty (30) days prior to the start of the event.643.3 All out of province schools must be listed on the form. The host may be subject to ﬁnes if participation from out of province teams not listed. 643.4 Upon receipt of the appropriate form BCSS will;○ Ensure that the competition is being conducted within BCSS rules and regulations and is in the best interest of the schools concerned;○ Complete and forward endorsement forms to the appropriate association(s) of the schools involved.643.5 BCSS and Alberta Schools Athletic Association have endorsed a blanket sanctioning policy for member schools situated near the Alberta-BC border as posted on the BCSS website.643.6 Competitions involving schools from three (3) or more different states must also receive sanctioning from the National Federation of State High School Associations (NHFS), and may be subject to an additional processing fee644.0 NON-MEMBER OR THIRD PARTY HOSTING 644.1 Any non-member or third-party institution (colleges, universities, organizations, companies or individuals) hosting a competition with BCSS member schools must obtain sanctioning from BCSS by submitting the appropriate form. 644.1.1 BCSS will charge a sanctioning fee of 3% of total BCSS team/participant registration to the host644.1.2 Any BCSS member school not listed on the form will not be able to participate. 644.1.3 If non-school (club or community) teams and BCSS member school teams are participating at the same tournament they must compete in separate categories/divisions/events etc. In the event of individual sports, high school athletes belonging to club teams should compete only as a member of their High School and only compete against High School athletes.644.1.4 Upon receipt of the appropriate form BCSS will;○ Complete and forward endorsement forms to the appropriate association(s) of the schools involved.○ BCSS will provide third party host with conﬁrmation of sanctioning once the appropriate endorsements from required provincial and state associations have been secured and list the tournament on the BCSS website as a ‘sanctioned event.’

Page 80

80 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook644.2 All hosting application forms must be submitted to BCSS no later than thirty (30) days prior to the start of the event. 645.0 TRAVELLING TO COMPETITION OUTSIDE BC645.1 Any member school travelling to competition (tournament, meet, event or exhibition) in Canada or the United States must obtain sanctioning from BCSS by submitting the appropriate form.645.2 Any member schools travelling on international tours, and/or cultural exchanges outside the Unites States or Canada must obtain sanctioning from BCSS by submitting the appropriate form. Member schools wishing to travel internationally for competition should check with BCSS prior to ﬁnalizing travel arrangements.645.2.1 The expectation is that member schools travelling internationally will participate in competition only against school teams.645.2.2 If travelling internationally to an area that does not have high school sport, Member Schools can apply to BCSS for an exemption to this policy at the discretion of the Executive Director. 645.2.3 The exemption will be evaluated by the Executive Director and a decision will be made based on the age of student-athletes, sport and location in question. 645.3 All travel sanctioning applications must be submitted to BCSS no later than thirty days (30) prior to the start of the event.645.4 Upon receipt of the appropriate form BCSS will;○ Ensure that the competition is being conducted within BCSS rules and regulations and is in the best interest of the schools concerned;○ Complete and forward endorsement forms to the appropriate association(s) of the schools involved.646.0 SANCTIONING PENALTIES 646.1 HOSTING UNSANCTIONED EVENTS Member schools or non-member/third party institutions not completing the appropriate forms, or intentionally providing inaccurate information will be ﬁned a minimum of $500.00 per instance.646.2 LATE SANCTIONING FORM SUBMISSION Member schools or Non-member/third party institutions not completing the appropriate form(s) in accordance with 643.2, 644.2, and 645.3 will be ﬁned a minimum of $200.00 per instance. 646.3 MEMBER SCHOOLS PARTICIPATING IN UNSANCTIONED COMPETITION Any Member School that participates in unsanctioned competition will be penalized. Penalties for competing in unsanctioned competition may include, but are not limited to, reduction in the allowed number of playing days, monetary ﬁnes, forfeiture of games, suspension of coach, and/or disqualiﬁcation from post-season play. Review of the circumstances and penalties remain at the discretion of the Executive Director.647.0 FUNDRAISING/PROMOTIONAL GAMES Despite 620.0, each team at a member school is permitted to play one (1) fundraising or promotional game per school year, whether the game occurs during the applicable season of play or not.647.1 A member school shall not participate in a fundraising or promotional game if the opposing team contains one (1)or more student-athletes from another member school.647.2 The member school must report the following details to the Executive Director, by no later than two (2) school days after the game:○ The member school team;○ The opposing team; and○ The date and location of the game.648.0 TOURING/HOSTING OUT-OF-SEASONDespite 620.0, each team at a member school may apply to BCSS on the appropriate form to:648.1 Travel internationally on one (1) tour outside of the applicable season of play; OR648.2 Host one (1) school team from outside North America for competition outside of the applicable season of play.649.0 A member school touring or hosting under 644.0 shall comply with all sanctioning requirements in BCSS Policies.

Page 81

Page 82

Page 83

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 83710.0 BCSS ZONE CHAMPIONSHIPS 711.0 BCSS ZONE CHAMPIONSHIPS Zones are responsible for hosting Zone Championships for the purpose of qualifying teams for Provincial Championships. All BCSS Zones shall determine the structure and process for their zone championship which must be led, planned, and executed in a manner consistent with the following objectives;711.1 To establish a systematic, transparent, equitable and objective qualiﬁcation process into the Provincial Championships711.2 To recognize schools from across the province as the best teams from their zone711.3 To create an opportunity to celebrate BC School Sports, our zones, local associations, member schools and student athletes, and the positive effects of education-based athletics.711.4 To host Zones within a timeline that allows for the submission of qualiﬁed teams or individuals for provincials to BCSS before the appropriate date 712.0 Only BCSS member schools may participate in qualiﬁcation play leading up to a BCSS championship, and in championship play. Only one (1) team from a member school may enter post season competition that leads up to a championship.713.0 If a Zone does not submit their list of qualifying teams/individuals to BCSS Staff (or tournament coordinator if necessary) by the published Provincial Championship registration deadline, that zone will forfeit any additional championship berths (other than the Zone Champion) for the following year for the sport in question. It is the responsibility of the Zone to conﬁrm that qualifying teams will accept their championship berth prior to submitting them to BCSS. 713.1 For Team Sports: if a team is registered for the Provincial Championship and subsequently withdraws (after the published deadline) the zone will forfeit any additional championship berths (other than the Zone Champion) for the following year for the sport in question.713.2 Zones may submit an appeal to the BCSS Executive Director in extraordinary circumstances to retain their championship berths for the following year.720.0 BCSS PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 721.0 BCSS PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPA BCSS Provincial Championship is an interscholastic event, tournament or meet organized by BCSS, and has the following characteristics:721.1 Are for school teams and/or individuals participating at the senior level of competition. Senior competition is deﬁned as the highest level of school competition in British Columbia, and is open to student-athletes up to and including the ﬁfth (5th) year of eligibility.721.2 Teams/Individuals participating at a BCSS championship must have qualiﬁed for the championship through a competitive qualiﬁcation process as determined by the applicable BCSS zone.721.2.1 Recognizing the limited number of teams and the ability to only safely play one football game per week, BCSS will run a provincial football league and qualiﬁcation process. 721.3 The championship must be organized and conducted under the Bylaws and Policies approved by the legislative assembly.721.4 No member school may host, coordinate, or attend any invitational event in a BCSS activity using the terms, “Provincial Championship,” “BC’s” or anything that would have a similar interpretation in its title, marketing, or awards. Provincial Championship designations are are reserved for those events recognized as such by BC School Sports.721.4.1 Schools that have teams participate in an invitational event represented as a Provincial Championship, will be subject to a $250 ﬁne per team. Additionally, any team that participates in an event represented as a Provincial Championship will result lose 10% of playing days for the senior team of that same gender the following school year. Subsequent infractions will result in escalated penalties at the discretion of the Executive Director. (i.e. If a junior boys basketball team plays in a invitational event presented as a provincial championship event, then the following year the Sr. Boys basketball team at that school will be reduced from 32 to 29 play dates).721.5 No 3rd party will receive sanctioning to host an event in a BCSS activity, that uses the terms, or anything implying “Provincial Championship” in its title, marketing or awards.721.5.1 Any 3rd party hosted sanctioned event that includes Provincial Championship language as per 721.5 will be refused sanctioning for the following year.721.6 Noisemakers – Artiﬁcial sound i.e., Aerosol horns, loud-speakers, megaphones, vuvuzela horns, whistles, and/or laser pointers are not permitted at any indoor BC School Sports Activities. (Note: should a situation arise regarding noise-makers, the game shall be stopped (at an appropriate time i.e. during a natural stoppage of play). And it shall be the sole responsibility of the Game Director, tournament organizer, or host team head coach to immediately address the issue at hand. There shall be no penalty charged to either team.)

Page 84

84 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook722.0 CHAMPIONSHIP RANKING AND TOURNAMENT FORMAT722.1 All BCSS championships will follow the tournament format set out and approved by the Legislative Assembly as outlined in section 1000. 722.2 Seeding for championships will be ﬁnalized by BCSS and the Tournament Committee with guidance from the sport speciﬁc provincial ranking committee where applicable. 723.0 BERTHING FOR PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 723.1 ALLOCATION OF BERTHS Berths into a provincial championship are allocated by approval of the Legislative Assembly. Berths must be allocated to a BCSS zone consistent with Section 15 of the Bylaws. Berths will not be awarded to a speciﬁc athletic association, subgroup, or school, with the exception of a berth being allocated to the championship host school where applicable. BCSS Provincial Championship berthing can be found in the BCSS Sport Speciﬁc Policies.723.2 QUALIFICATION PROCESS Each BCSS zone shall have at least one berth into each provincial championship through a zone championship event. Berths unable to be ﬁlled by zones will be allocated in accordance with the applicable BCSS policy.723.3 BERTHING DEADLINE Sports that use team registration numbers and berthing ratios to determine provincial championship berths will be calculated by the number of appropriately registered teams at the time of the deadline. Teams that register after the Team Registration Deadline will remain eligible to qualify for a championship berth. Inactive teams (teams that are not actively practicing and competing) will be removed from the berthing ratio calculations. 723.4 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BERTHS PER ZONE - TEAM SPORTS No zone will receive more than four (4) berths to a team sports championship, not including the host berth, if applicable. Exclusions: Badminton, Field Hockey, Football. If according to participation ratios a zone should receive a 5th berth, that berth will be awarded to the zone with the next highest berthing ratio. If zones are tied in berthing ratio the berth should be awarded to the zone that has the best placings (lowest points) at the previous championship, averaged by the number of teams at the championship. (E.g., Zone A: 1st place + 6th place = 7pts divided by 2 teams, for a total of 3.5, Zone B: 3rd place = 3.0, Zone C 2nd place + 6th place + 12th place = 20 points divided by three (3) teams for a total of 6.667. )724.0 CHAMPIONSHIP ENTRY AND/OR PARTICIPATION FEESEntry fees will be established by BCSS in conjunction with the appropriate Championship Host Committee. When establishing entry fees the goal is to ensure costs of BCSS championships are as low as possible.724.1 The entry fee for teams/individuals competing in a BCSS provincial championship are intended to cover the expenses of:○ Facility rental and equipment;○ Event ofﬁcials/judges; and○ Medical coverage at the tournament; ○ Webcasting where applicable724.2 Provincial Championship items such as championship apparel, souvenir programs, etc. cannot be mandatory elements to be paid by participants.725.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS SOCIAL EVENTS FOR STUDENT-ATHLETES Social events such as a banquet or hospitality function may be offered for the Provincial Championship participants. The charge to student-athletes and coaches or competing schools for social events cannot be mandatory, however schools are strongly encouraged to participate as it enriches the championship experience for student-athletes.726.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP CALENDARThe Provincial Championship Calendar set by the Legislative Assembly 3 years in advance is created with the following objectives;726.1 To minimize disruption to instructional time, cost and strain on human resources.726.2 To recognize the number of school days involved726.3 To ensure facility needs for speciﬁc events.726.4 To ensure all Ofﬁcial BCSS Championships end on a Saturday unless otherwise stated on the calendar726.5 BCSS championships will not exceed four (4) days of competition, with a maximum of three (3) instructional (in-session) days at any championship.

Page 85

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 85 Championships that include ancillary events such as coaches’ meetings, course familiarization, ceremonies or banquets will not exceed ﬁve (5) days with a maximum of four (4) instructional days. When possible, championships will incorporate ancillary events into a competition day. Note: Provincial professional development days, and provincial statutory holidays are not considered instructional days; however, district pro-d days are considered an instructional day as not all districts across the province are out of session at the same time.727.0 STATIC SITE CHAMPIONSHIPS The Legislative Assembly will approve the list of events that qualify for the Static Site Championship subsidy. Generally, this will be where an event that is not available for host bidding, is in a ﬁxed location for 3 years or longer. Staff will track championship venues and annually bring recommendations to the Assembly should an event be hosted for 3 years in the same location, or subsequently an event currently on the list is moved. If the venue changes but isn’t in a materially different area of the province, the Assembly may choose to keep the event on the list to ensure the intent of the policy is applied. 727.1 The championship events that qualify for the Static Site Championship subsidy are as follows: ○ AA Boys Soccer○ AAA Boys Soccer○ AA Girls Basketball○ AAA Girls Basketball○ AAAA Girls Basketball ○ A Boys Basketball○ AA Boys Basketball○ AAA Boys Basketball○ AAAA Boys Basketball○ AA Boys Rugby XVs○ AAA Boys Rugby XVs727.2 STATIC SITE CHAMPIONSHIP TRAVEL SUBSIDY ELIGIBILITY To be eligible to receive the Static Site Championship Travel Subsidy, a team must qualify for an eligible championship, and the school must be more than 100 km from the championship venue. Once an event is added to the list in 727.1 by the Legislative Assembly, the Board of Directors will conﬁrm the boundaries for funding before the season of play. Generally, those schools in the 4 zones in the Lower Mainland/Fraser Valley will not be eligible, but there may be some exceptions depending on the exact championship venue. 727.3 STATIC SITE PAYMENT After the last championship identiﬁed in 727.1. The grant allocation to each eligible member school will be calculated by BCSS staff. The total amount collected for the Static Site Championship Travel Subsidy will be paid out annually and be prorated based on the number of days of each tournament and the distance travelled. 730.0 ESTABLISHING A PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP HOST 731.0 DETERMINING A PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP HOST The Legislative Assembly determines whether championships are hosted by a member school or hosted at a centralized location by a Championship Host Committee with guidance from BCSS staff.731.1 MEMBER SCHOOL HOSTED CHAMPIONSHIPS – Any BCSS member school may bid to host a BCSS Provincial Championship at their school in a tier in which they compete in the applicable sport. By hosting a championship, the host school is guaranteed a host berth into the championship but are still required to pay the championship entry fee. 731.2 CENTRALIZED CHAMPIONSHIPS – The Legislative Assembly will determine the venue based on sport speciﬁc needs. The BCSS staff will work to establish a championship host committee for each Centralized Championship. There will be no host school, or host berth applicable with these championships. 731.3 CHAMPIONSHIP BID AVAILABILITY; The following championships are school hosted championships and are open for bid by member schools; SCHOOL HOSTED CHAMPIONSHIPSA BOYS SOCCERAA FIELD HOCKEY

Page 86

86 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookAAA FIELD HOCKEYA BOYS VOLLEYBALLAA BOYS VOLLEYBALLAAA BOYS VOLLEYBALLA GIRLS VOLLEYBALLAA GIRLS VOLLEYBALLAAA GIRLS VOLLEYBALLAAAA GIRLS VOLLEYBALLCURLINGBADMINTONMOUNTAIN BIKINGA GIRLS SOCCERAA GIRLS SOCCERAAA GIRLS SOCCERA GOLFAA GOLFAAA GOLFAA TENNISAAA TENNIS732.0 EXPECTATIONS OF A HOST All BCSS hosts are expected to uphold the following standards while planning, leading, and executing BCSS Championships;732.1 Provide safe facilities and equipment for all participants (student-athletes, coaches, ofﬁcials, volunteers, and spectators) of championship events.732.2 Uphold all BCSS Codes of Ethics.732.3 Actively contribute to enhancing the BCSS Championship brand.732.4 Follow the guidelines of the BCSS Championship Hosting Manual.733.0 BID PROCESSBased on the Provincial Championships available for bid in section 731.3, member schools wishing to host are required to submit a bid to the Legislative Assembly.733.1 Bid Requirements: The following information must be included in the bid to be considered by the Legislative Assembly. The Legislative Assembly may request further information on any submission.733.1.1 General tournament logistics including but not limited to event venue speciﬁcs, spectator capacity, number of playing areas, and available changing facilities733.1.2 Identify potential tournament committee members and the Tournament Director 733.1.3 Proposed budget for the event with anticipated expenses/revenues733.1.4 Local accommodation available and transportation options for travelling teams733.1.5 Administrator signature of endorsement, acknowledgement and understanding of the BCSS Championship Hosting Manual and Host Expectations733.2 As per the schedule below, the Legislative Assembly will evaluate all submitted bids at least 18 months prior to the date of the championship.733.3 Any school hosted championships without a host after the appropriate meeting of the Legislative Assembly will be ﬁlled by approval of the Board of Directors.

Page 87

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 87734.0 BID APPLICATION IMPORTANT DATES734.1 Host bids for the FALL and WINTER Season of Play Championships will be reviewed and voted on by the Legislative Assembly at the Annual General Meeting in Spring, approximately 18 months before the championships.734.2 Host bids for the SPRING Season of Play Championships will be reviewed and voted on by the Legislative Assembly at the Fall Planning Meeting the year prior to the championship dates, approximately 18-20 months prior to the championships.MEETING DATE CHAMPIONSHIP BIDS BEING AWARDEDFall Planning Meeting 2024 Spring Championships 2026Spring Annual General Meeting 2025 Fall/Winter Championships 2026Fall Planning Meeting 2025 Spring Championships 2027Spring Annual General Meeting 2026 Fall/Winter Championships 2027Fall Planning Meeting 2026 Spring Championships 2028Spring Annual General Meeting 2027 Fall/Winter Championships 2028Fall Planning Meeting 2027 Spring Championships 2029734.3 All host bids must be submitted to the BCSS ofﬁce 4 weeks prior to the appropriate meeting.734.4 Any School-Hosted Championship that does not have a conﬁrmed host school on the ﬁrst day of the Season of Play for that sport, will be cancelled for that season. Schools may still participate in league, zone championship, and exhibition events. Fall Season of Play Championship hosts must be conﬁrmed prior to the last day of school in the preceding school year.

Page 88

Page 89

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 89810.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE & TEAM ELIGIBILITY 811.0 BCSS recognizes the right of all student-athletes to choose which school they attend and which subjects they study. BCSS, however, is charged with the responsibility of drafting, implementing and enforcing rules on eligibility for those student- athletes who seek the privilege of participating in interscholastic competition. The overriding purpose of these rules is to ensure fair and equitable competition for all student-athletes participating in BCSS activity. Individual student-athletes must meet the applicable eligibility requirements of BCSS and be listed on the appropriate STARS roster to be eligible for competition.812.0 A member school team is deﬁned as any one (1) student-athlete or group of student-athletes who are representing the member school in interscholastic sport activity, and are supervised by a school district approved coach/sponsor and under the authority of the school administrator. All member school sport teams must be properly registered in STARS by the published deadline dates in order to compete in BCSS competitions. Individual student-athletes must be registered and approved in STARS as part of their eligibility requirements. Additionally, student-athletes must be registered on the appropriate STARS team roster.812.1 The school that is being represented by a team must be a member school of BCSS as per 310.0812.2 A member school team is prohibited to compete against non-member school teams, club teams and community teams in a BCSS activity, with the exception of Gr. 8 school teams where non-member BCSS middle school leagues exist. This exemption is only valid for league contests and does not apply to tournaments or other exhibition play.813.0 STUDENT-ATHLETES REGISTERED AT AND COMPETING FOR A MEMBER SCHOOLA student-athlete can only play for the member school at which they are registered. Student-athletes must be in grades eight (8) to twelve (12) at a BCSS member school in order to compete in any BCSS competition.813.1 An individual student-athlete is only eligible to compete in one (1) thirteen (13) week sanctioned season of play per sport in each school year.814.0 STUDENT-ATHLETES REGISTERED AT MORE THAN ONE (1) MEMBER SCHOOLIf a student-athlete is registered at two (2) schools, the student-athlete may only participate in BCSS activities for the member school at which the student-athlete has the largest percentage of the credit load.814.1 If the credit load at the two (2) member schools is equal, the school at which the student-athlete was ﬁrst registered at in a BCSS activity would be considered their home school.814.2 If, at any time after the student-athlete’s home school has been established, the member school at which the student- athlete is enrolled in the majority of his/her credit load changes, the school which now has the majority of course load, must establish eligibility by meeting the conditions outlined in 800.0.815.0 FULL-TIME STUDENT-ATHLETE STATUSA student athlete must be enrolled in and attending a minimum of a sixty-two and a half percent (62.5%) course load. A one hundred percent (100%) course load is deﬁned as thirty two (32) credits or eight (8) standard courses.815.1 LINEAR SCHOOL SYSTEM - Student-athletes must be enrolled in and attending a minimum of ﬁve (5) full time courses (20 credits) within the school year to be considered eligible.815.2 SEMESTER SCHOOL SYSTEM - Student-athletes must be enrolled in and attending a minimum of two (2) full time courses (8 credits) in both semesters and a minimum of ﬁve (5) courses total within the school year to be considered eligible.815.2.1 A student-athlete who completes his/her school graduation requirements mid-year (January) and does not continue to enroll in courses, must have been awarded credit in a minimum of three (3) courses in the ﬁrst semester to remain eligible for the conclusion of the winter season of play. The student-athlete is ineligible to begin a new season of play (Spring).815.2.2 Student-athletes who complete graduation requirements during the current school year and continue to take courses, will remain eligible, should they continue to meet all other eligibility requirements.816.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE AGE & COMPETITIVE LEVELS To be age-eligible to compete in competition of a BCSS activity student-athletes must meet both the age and grade eight (8)entry dates as outlined below:COMPETITION LEVEL AGE GRADE 8 ENTRY DATEGRADE 11 & 12 (Senior)Student-athlete must be under nineteen (19) years or age as of December 31 of the current school year2020 or later

Page 90

90 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookGrade 10 (Junior)Student-athlete must be under seventeen (17) years of age as of December 31 of the current school year2022 or laterGrade 9 (Juvenile)Student-athlete must be under sixteen (16) years of age as of December 31 of the current school year2023 or laterGrade 8 (Bantam)Student-athlete must be under ﬁfteen (15) years of age as of December 31 of the current school yearMust be 2024817.0 GRADE SEVEN (7) STUDENT-ATHLETE COMPETITIONGrade seven (7) student-athletes are not automatically allowed to participate in competition of a BCSS activity. A grade seven (7) eligibility application can be made to the Eligibility Ofﬁcer for an exemption to allow a grade seven (7) student-athlete to play for a grade eight (8) or bantam team where the member school would not otherwise be able to ﬁeld a team due to insufﬁcient numbers.817.1 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer will review the grade seven (7) eligibility application to ensure that all of the following conditions are met:817.1.1 Grade seven (7) student-athletes must be registered as a student at the school applying for the exemption;817.1.2 Grade seven (7) student-athletes can only participate on a grade eight (8) or bantam team sports;817.1.3 Grade seven (7) student-athletes cannot participate in the individual sports of aquatics, cross country, mountain biking, skiing/snowboarding, track and ﬁeld, or wrestling;817.1.4 Grade eight (8) or bantam student-athletes cannot be registered on the member school’s more senior team for the requested team sport;817.1.5 Grade seven (7) student-athletes being allowed to participate in a grade eight (8) or bantam level team is to allow a member school to ﬁeld a grade eight (8) or bantam level team which otherwise would not happen due to an insufﬁcient number of grade (8) student-athletes wanting to participate;817.1.6 The number of grade seven (7) student-athletes on the given team must not exceed the number of grade eight (8) or bantam level student-athletes; and817.1.7 The maximum number of student-athletes on the given team must not exceed the BCSS minimum numbers required to ﬁeld the team (see 1000.0).817.1.8 Where all conditions outlined in 817.1.1 through 817.1.6 are met, schools in category 4 or lower (as per 340.0) are not subject to 817.1.7 in the sports of basketball and volleyball. However, the roster size may not exceed twelve (12) if using grade sevens (7).817.2 Application and conditional acceptance of grade seven (7) student-athletes may be terminated by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer if the 817.1 conditions are not met.817.3 Grade seven (7) student-athletes who play on a grade eight (8) or bantam team will begin their ﬁve (5) years of eligibility on the date they enter grade eight (8).817.4 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer’s decision is ﬁnal and conclusive and shall not be appealed or reviewed in any manner.818.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE PLAYING UP & MOVEMENT BETWEEN TEAMS818.1 INDIVIDUAL STUDENT-ATHLETES PLAYING UP TO A MORE SENIOR SCHOOL’S TEAM Middle/Junior member school athletes whose feeder school (senior school) has a Membership Category of four (4) or lower can apply to “play up” to the senior member that they would normally attend, if by the roster registration deadline (see 832.3), they have approval of both member school’s administrators, athletic directors, students, and parent(s) or legal guardian(s). The middle/junior school must be a member in good standing. The local athletic association, the district superintendent, and BCSS must be notiﬁed by using the appropriate form. Senior member schools must not register these student-athletes in STARS as an enrollee of their school. BCSS will place the middle/ junior school student-athletes on the senior member schools STARS team roster when the form is received and approved. Any student-athletes not properly registered will be deemed ineligible.818.1.1 Member schools with Football and/or Rugby Programs may allow grade nine (9) student-athletes at their feeder school (middle school) to play up to the more senior school Junior Varsity (JV) team. Grade nine (9) student-athletes at a feeder school (middle school) may not play up to the senior school varsity team.818.2 LIMITS TO PLAYING/MOVING UP Student-athletes attending a middle school or junior secondary school cannot play or move up in the sports of aquatics, cross country, mountain biking, skiing/snowboarding, track and ﬁeld, or wrestling as the minimum number to form a school team in these sports are one (1) athlete.

Page 91

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 91818.2.1 The exemption to this rule is football whereby student-athletes registered on a lower level team may play for the higher level team at the same time without restriction during playoffs.818.2.2 Member schools where the middle school (feeder school) and the senior school have the same grade levels (ie. grade levels 7,8,9 at the middle school and 9-12 at the senior school), the student-athletes attending the middle school cannot move up to the senior school's teams.818.3 MOVEMENT BETWEEN TEAMS A student-athlete who is otherwise eligible and is registered on the school team, may play up to the more senior team in that sport during league play without restriction. Any competition by a student-athlete on the more senior team following the conclusion of the more senior team’s regular season, requires the student-athlete to be ‘moved-up’ onto the more senior team. The move-up of the student-athlete must be requested in STARS by submitting a Moving Up Form. Once approved, the student-athlete will be registered with the more senior team for the remainder of the season and is no longer eligible to play in any competition on the younger aged team. Note: student-athletes who play up are still subject to the maximum-playing days within the season of play, as outlined in policy. The member school is responsible to be aware of playing days for any student-athlete that may be participating on more than one team.818.3.1 If a school registers two (2) or more teams in the same age group in the same sport, there will not be any movement between those two (2) teams for competition.818.3.2 Football is exempt from 818.2 Any registered student-athlete appropriately registered on a Football Team may play up to a more senior team during playoffs without restriction - including playing for both teams during the playoffs, provided that the student-athlete playing up on the more senior team is registered on a lower level team. No student-athlete registered on a senior team with BCSS may play down at a lower level.819.0 NUMBER OF YEARS OF ELIGIBILITY - FIVE (5) YEARSStudent-athletes have ﬁve (5) consecutive years of BCSS competition eligibility, starting on the entry date into grade eight (8). A year is considered to be the twelve (12) month period between September of one (1) school year and September of the next school year.819.1 IF A STUDENT-ATHLETE DOESN’T PARTICIPATE If a student-athlete chooses not to participate during one (1) or more years of the ﬁve (5) year period, or is not on a team roster during one (1) or more years of the ﬁve (5) year period, or leaves school (withdraws) for a time period during the ﬁve (5) year eligibility time period, that time period will still count toward the ﬁve (5) years of eligibility.819.2 UNGRADED STUDENT-ATHLETES For ungraded student-athletes in schools where it is difﬁcult to determine when a student-athlete entered grade eight (8) (e.g. middle school, K-10, K-12 schools), the student-athlete will be considered to be a grade eight (8) student-athlete in the school year commencing in September of the calendar year in which the student-athlete becomes thirteen (13) years of age.819.3 EXTENSION OF FIVE (5) YEARS OF ELIGIBILITY DUE TO LOST SCHOOL FOR MEDICAL REASONS If a signiﬁcant portion of a school year is lost due to illness or accident, the member school may submit an eligibility application on the student-athlete’s behalf to have up to one (1) year of eligibility restored (See 943.0). Medical documentation must show that the loss of an academic year due to medical reasons resulted in the student-athlete having to repeat a grade and prevented the standard ﬁve (5) year progression through school. The eligibility time restored will not include any seasons of play in which the student-athlete had been enrolled in school during the academic school year in question. The eligibility application must include medical documentation, academic records and absentee records for the school(s). No student-athlete will be granted a sixth (6th) year of eligibility in any sport he/she has already participated in for part or all of ﬁve (5) seasons. Nor will that student-athlete be granted a sixth (6th) year of eligibility if they have participated in any part of both a fourth (4th) and ﬁfth (5th) year of eligibility.819.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR FAMILIES MOVING TO BRITISH COLUMBIA A student-athlete whose family is coming into British Columbia from another province or another country is eligible for ﬁve (5) years from their date of entry into grade eight (8) or the grade eight (8) equivalent in their previous place(s) of residence. If documentation is unavailable, the student’s birth year will be used for the students date of entry into grade eight (8) as consistent with 819.2 ungraded student-athletes.819.5 RETURNING EXCHANGE STUDENT-ATHLETE A BC student-athlete who is returning to British Columbia after conclusion of a one (1) year or less outgoing student exchange program, and who has concluded their eligibility calendar in accordance with 816.0, may have up to one (1) year of eligibility restored only if all of the following conditions are met:○ The student-athlete has participated in a recognized exchange program;○ The student-athlete is returning to the same BCSS member school that they attended prior to leaving on the exchange program;

Page 92

92 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook○ The student-athlete does not participate in any BCSS competition in BCSS approved sports in which the student-athlete participated in inter-school and/or club competition while on the exchange;○ The student-athlete meets all other eligibility requirements; and○ A letter from the administrator conﬁrming compliance with the conditions outlined in 819.5 is required.820.0 RESIDENCY REQUIREMENTThe residency rule is intended to create an equitable environment in which its member schools can compete, and at the same time prevent those abuses that taint the goals on interscholastic athletics. Primarily the residency rule is intended to prevent athletic recruiting, prevent students from choosing schools for athletic reasons, and to promote families as the best environment for students to live while attending school. Deterring students from avoiding imposed discipline, protecting school programs by discouraging athletic transfers and protecting the opportunities for bona ﬁde resident students to participate are also reasons for the residence rule.820.1 Student-Athletes Must Fulﬁlll One of the Following Residency Requirements:820.1.1 Reside with parent(s) in BC;820.1.2 Reside with a legal guardian in BC. Guardianship must have been in place for twelve (12) months prior to the period for which eligibility is sought.820.1.3 Must be a ‘Ward of the Province of BC’ and assigned to an individual or family by the Ministry of Children and Family Development.820.1.4 Must be attending a BC member school as a ‘residing full-time boarding student’ – this must have been in place for twelve (12) months prior to the period for which eligibility is sought; During the twelve (12) month waiting period, the student-athlete may play subject to 900.0; or820.1.5 Must be attending a BCSS member school as an international student or exchange student and be recognized by the District Board or Independent School ofﬁce as such – student-athletes must reside in BC and attend the member school for a period of ﬁve (5) months of be eligible to participate in BCSS competition.820.2 Any student-athlete who does not meet the residency requirements is fully ineligible for a period of twelve (12) months from the date they seek eligibility. At the completion of the twelve (12) months the student-athlete will become eligible if they meet the following:820.2.1 The student-athlete maintains the same address and living situation throughout the twelve (12) months; and820.2.2 The student-athlete must meet all other eligibility requirements as per the entirety of the Competitive Rules and Regulations.821.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE GENDER Female student-athletes may only play on a team designated as a girl’s sport, and male student-athletes may only play on a team designated as a boy’s sport. Both female and male student-athletes may compete on a team designated as a coed sport, team designated as a boy’s sport. Both female and male student-athletes may compete on a team designated as a coed sport, in accordance with the sport-speciﬁc roster allocations.821.1 Notwithstanding 821.0 a student-athlete may be permitted to participate in a sex-segregated sport inconsistent with their sex in the following circumstances:821.1.1 A female student-athlete may play on a boys’ team if her school will not offer a girls’ team in that sport (in a recognized BCSS activity or not) at the appropriate age level during the same school year. A letter from the administrator conﬁrming a girls’ team will not be offered must be sent into the BCSS ofﬁce. If a female in a different season of play during the same school year.821.2 GENDER IDENTITY - A student-athlete may participate with the opposite sex in a sex-segregated sport on the basis that doing so would be consistent with their gender identity if the student-athlete’s application under 821.0 is granted.821.2.1 A student-athlete who does not identify as either binary gender or identiﬁes as, “non-gendered”, or “gender neutral”, may participate with the sex in which they feel most comfortable.821.2.2 A student-athlete who identiﬁes as “gender ﬂuid”, may participate with the sex they identify with at the time of the season of play if the student-athlete’s application under 821.0 is granted. The student- athlete may not switch genders within the season of play. If they wish to identify as the opposite gender in a different season of play, a letter from the school administration must be submitted to the BCSS ofﬁce.821.3 A student-athlete seeking eligibility pursuant to 821.0 must make an application to the Executive Director.821.3.1 Each application under 821.0 must include the following:821.3.1.1 A written statement from the student-athlete documenting a student-athlete’s gender identiﬁcation;

Page 93

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 93821.3.1.2 A written statement from the principal conﬁrming the student-athlete’s gender identity.821.3.2 The Executive Director shall consider the following factors together with any other factors that he/she considers reasonable when making a decision under 821.0:821.3.2.1 Flexibility, and the student-athlete’s privacy, will be prioritized in decision-making;821.3.2.2 The importance of fair and equitable competition for all students participating in the sport in which the student is applying to participate;821.3.2.3 Existing practices regarding female student-athletes’ participation on boys teams, as per 821.0, are to be preserved; and821.3.2.4 An environment where intersex, transitioning and trans-gender students can exist and thrive should be provided.821.3.3 The Executive Director’s decision is ﬁnal and conclusive and shall not be appealed or judicially reviewed.821.3.4 Once a student-athlete has been granted eligibility under 821.0, their eligibility shall be effective for the duration of the student-athlete’s school sport career and does not need to be renewed unless the gender identity changes as per 821.2.2822.0 ONLINE LEARNING AND ALTERNATE SCHOOL STUDENT-ATHLETES822.1 Online and alternate school student-athletes may compete in BCSS competition provided that:822.1.1 TEAM SPORTSa) The student athlete competes for their previously established home school; or b) If the student athlete has not previously established a home school, they must compete for whose catchment area they reside.822.1.2 INDIVIDUAL SPORTS A student-athlete enrolled at an online or alternate school must compete for the school they are registered at, in those BCSS activities identiﬁed as individual sports (Aquatics, Cross Country, Skiing, Snowboarding, Wrestling, Mountain Biking, and Track and Field). If the student-athlete does not reside in the same zone where their online or alternate school is located, the student-athlete must qualify through the zone they reside in and it is the responsibility of their school to register them for zone championships.823.0 INTERNATIONAL STUDENTSFor International Students (Boarding, Exchange, and International) to become eligible to participate in a BCSS activity, the school Principal or District Ofﬁce shall verify in writing and submit to the BCSS ofﬁce that:823.1 The BCSS member school in which the student-athlete ﬁrst registers and seeks eligibility will become the student- athlete’s home school and where their eligibility is tied. Any subsequent transfers from the student-athlete’s home school are subject to 900.0 Student-Athlete Transfers.823.2 International Students’ (Boarding, Exchange & International) eligibility and competitive age level will be determined by their birthdate prior to becoming eligible to participate in a BCSS activity, the school Principal or District Ofﬁce shall verify in writing and submit to the BCSS ofﬁce that the International Students meet the following:823.2.1 The acceptance of the student-athlete is based solely on academic criteria;823.2.2 The student-athlete is enrolled at the receiving school for at least ﬁve (5) consecutive months or one (1) semester;823.2.3 The student-athlete has not graduated from a high school program;823.2.4 That a student-athlete’s participation in extracurricular athletics was not a factor in acceptance to the school;823.2.5 The student-athlete is not receiving a scholarship, bursary, or ﬁnancial awards resulting from or relating to student-athlete participation;823.2.6 The student-athlete is eligible as per all other BCSS eligibility policies, including age and the eligibility calendar.823.3 In addition to the above, International Students must meet the criteria in one of the following International Student Designations to be deemed eligible for BCSS activity:823.3.1 EXCHANGE STUDENT ATHLETEa) The Exchange Program is an established and recognized program by either the federal or provincial government;b) The student-athletes transfers into the member school from outside British Columbia and is not a resident of British Columbia;

Page 94

94 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook823.3.2 BOARDING STUDENT ATHLETEa) The student-athlete is registered at a member school as a boarding student and pays tuition according to the published boarding student policy and fee schedule;b) The student-athlete resides in a school dormitory;c) The student-athlete transfers into BCSS member school from:• Outside of Canada: The student-athlete can compete in any BCSS activity; or• Inside of Canada: The student-athlete is ineligible for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of transfer to compete in any BCSS activity in any school sport in which he/she was registered for at their previous school in the twelve (12) months prior to the date of transfer. The student-athlete does not become eligible under this category until the member school submits Notiﬁcation of Transfer from to the Eligibility Ofﬁcer for review.d) The student-athlete must pay 100% of the posted rate as published by the district and/ or school they are attending. Should a boarding student receive any form of ﬁnancial aid, scholarship, bursary or any other form of third (3rd) party support, the student must pay a minimum of $26,000 after any ﬁnancial support in order to be eligible.823.3.3 INTERNATIONAL STUDENT ATHLETEa) The student-athlete is registered at a member school as an international student and pays tuition to that school district according to the published international student policy and fee schedule;b) The student-athlete is placed with a home-stay family, lives with parents or lives with family members who have custodial guardianship over the student-athlete;c) The student-athlete transfers into the member school from outside of Canadad) The student-athlete must pay 100% of the posted rate as published by the district and/or school they are attending. Should an international student receive any form of ﬁnancial aid, scholarship, bursary or any other form of third (3rd) party support, the student must pay a minimum of $26,000 after any ﬁnancial support in order to be eligible.830.0 REGISTRATION831.0 REGISTRATION OF ELIGIBLE STUDENT-ATHLETES Prior to participating in competition of a BCSS activity, the member school is responsible for ensuring that any:831.1 Student-athletes are eligible as per the entirety of the Competitive Rules and Regulations;831.2 Student-athletes are registered on the applicable STARS roster by published deadlines; and831.3 Student-athletes have not competed in more than one (1) interscholastic season of play per sport each year as deﬁned by BCSS.832.0 REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS 832.1 TEAM REGISTRATION DEADLINES In each season of play, member schools are required to register their teams by meeting the minimum numbers of student-athletes (1000.0) in the age levels of competition in which they wish to participate. Member schools will not be penalized for registering a team and then choosing not to participate. Team Registration must be completed in STARS by:○ Fall – October 2, 2024○ Winter – January 8, 2025○ Spring – April 9, 2025832.2 PENALTIES FOR REGISTRATION AFTER TEAM REGISTRATION DEADLINES832.2.1 In the event a team is not registered in STARS after the Team Registration Deadline (Team and Minimum Numbers) and twenty-one (21) days or more prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials), the member school will be assessed and automatic ﬁne of $50 per team. There is a maximum ﬁne of $300/member school per season of play.832.2.2 In the event a team is not registered in STARS after the Team Registration Deadline and between twenty (20) to eleven (11) days (inclusive) prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials), the member school will be assessed an automatic ﬁne of $150 per team (the season maximum does not apply).832.2.3 In the event a team is not registered in STARS after the Team Registration Deadline and ten (10) days or less prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials), the member school will be assessed an automatic ﬁne of $250 per team (the season maximum does not apply).

Page 95

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 95Missed Team Registration Deadline(Team and Minimum Numbers)*Maximum only applies to 21 days or more prior toProvincial CompetitionDays Until Provincials Fine Amount21 Days or more$50 per team*Maximum $300 per season of playFrom 20 - 11 Days $150 per team10 Days or Less $250 per teamThe ﬁrst (1st) day of a provincial championship is counted as day one (1)832.3 ROSTER REGISTRATION DEADLINE In each season of play, member schools may add any additional student-athletes to complete their rosters by the Roster Registration Deadline. This includes, eligible student-athletes who are new to the member school or who are joining the team after the Team Registration Deadline (these student-athletes must not have participated in any competition(s) prior to being registered with BCSS). Roster Registration must be competed in STARS by:○ Fall – October 16, 2024○ Winter – January 22, 2025○ Spring – April 23, 2025832.4 PENALTIES FOR REGISTRATION AFTER THE ROSTER REGISTRATION DEADLINE832.4.1 In the event an individual student-athlete is not registered on the STARS team roster after the Roster Registration Deadline and twenty-one (21) days or more prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials) and is deemed eligible to play by BCSS, the member school will be assessed an automatic ﬁne of $25.832.4.2 In the event an individual student-athlete is not registered on the STARS team roster after the Roster Registration Deadline and between twenty (20) to eleven (11) days (inclusive) prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials) and is deemed eligible to play by BCSS, the member school will be assessed an automatic ﬁne of $100.832.4.3 In the event an individual student-athlete is not registered on the STARS team roster after the Roster Registration Deadline and ten (10) days or less prior to the start of Provincial Championships (inclusive of the ﬁrst (1st) day of Provincials) and is deemed eligible to play by BCSS, the member school will be assessed an automatic ﬁne of $250.Missed Roster Registration DeadlineDays Until Provincials Fine Amount21 Days or more $25 per student-athleteFrom 20 - 11 Days $100 per student-athlete10 Days or Less $250 per student-athleteThe ﬁrst (1st) day of a provincial championship is counted as day one (1)832.4.4 In extraordinary circumstances, the BCSS Executive Director may in his or her sole discretion, reduce or waive a ﬁne for registration after the roster deadline. The request must be in writing, state the extraordinary circumstances on the late registration and be received within ﬁve (5) days of notice of the ﬁne. The request shall be e-mailed to the BCSS ofﬁce. The decision of the Executive Director is ﬁnal and binding on all parties.832.5 PROCEDURES FOR DEALING WITH VIOLATIONS OF THE REGISTRATION POLICIES832.5.1 THE OFFENDING SCHOOL SELF-REPORTSA violation of Registration Policies occurs when a student-athlete who otherwise would be eligible competes in interscholastic athletics in a BCSS activity without properly being registered832.5.2 BCSS Investigation by the Executive Directora) Verbal conﬁrmation of the violation with the responding member school; and b) The additional information will be added administratively to STARS.832.5.3 Penalties as per 832.0a) Fines will be assessed in accordance with the approved ﬁne schedule in 832.0;b) The member school has ten (10) school days to pay the ﬁne (all ﬁnes are payable to BCSS); andc) If the ﬁne is not paid within ten (10) school days, the team will not be eligible to compete in any BCSS activity until the ﬁne payment is received.

Page 96

96 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook832.6 REGISTRATION VIOLATION DISCOVERED WITHOUT SELF-REPORTING832.6.1 BCSS Investigation by the Executive Directora) Verbal conﬁrmation of the violation with the responding member school;b) Written “cease and desist” notiﬁcation stating that the student-athlete and/or team is ineligible and the ﬁne (cc: athletic association and BCSS zone); andc) The student-athlete and/or team is not eligible to compete in any BCSS activity until all student- athletes are properly registered by BCSS staff in STARS.832.6.2 Penalties as per 832.0a) Fines will be assessed in accordance with the approved ﬁne schedule in 832.0;b) The member school has ten (10) school days to pay the ﬁne (all ﬁnes are payable to BCSS); andc) If the ﬁne is not paid within ten (10) school days, the team will not be eligible to compete in any BCSS activity until the ﬁne payment is received.833.0 PROCEDURES FOR DEALING WITH VIOLATIONS OF ELIGIBILITY POLICIES833.1 THE OFFENDING SCHOOL SELF-REPORTS A violation of eligibility policies occurs when a student-athlete who is not eligible to compete in interscholastic athletics in a BCSS activity competes in an activity. It is considered an eligibility infraction if the athlete has competed before being deemed eligible, or in the case of a member school neglecting to initiate the eligibility application process, after the fact is deemed ineligible.833.1.1 BCSS Investigation by the Executive Directora) Verbal conﬁrmation of the violation with the member school;b) Written “cease and desist” notiﬁcation stating that the student-athlete and/or team is ineligible and the ﬁne (cc: athletic association and BCSS zone); andc) The student-athlete(s) is not eligible unless an Eligibility Application is ﬁled with BCSS and accepted by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer.833.1.2 Penalties as per 810.0a) Forfeiture of any competition in a BCSS activity in which the ineligible student-athlete(s) has participated;b) A $50 ﬁne per instance, to a maximum of $200; this is separate from registration ﬁnes, should they be necessary;c) The member school has ten (10) school days to pay the ﬁne (all ﬁnes are payable to BCSS); andd) If the ﬁne is not paid within ten (10) school days, the team will not be eligible to compete in any BCSS activity until the ﬁne payment is received.833.2 ELIGIBILITY VIOLATION DISCOVERED WITHOUT SELF-REPORTING833.2.1 BCSS Investigation by the Executive Directora) Verbal conﬁrmation of the violation with the member school;b) Written “cease and desist” notiﬁcation stating the circumstances of ineligibility and the ﬁne (cc: athletic association and BCSS zone); andc) The student-athlete(s) is not eligible unless an Eligibility Application is ﬁled with BCSS and accepted by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer.833.2.2 Penalties as per 810.0a) Forfeiture of any competition in a BCSS activity in which the ineligible student-athlete(s) has participated; A $50 ﬁne per instance, to a maximum of $500; this is separate from registration ﬁnes, should they be necessary;b) The member school has ten (10) school days to pay the ﬁne (all ﬁnes are payable to BCSS); andc) If the ﬁne is not paid within ten (10) school days, the team will not be eligible to compete in any BCSS activity until the ﬁne payment is received.

Page 97

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 97840.0 JOINTLY SPONSORED TEAMS 841.0 BCSS believes there is merit in allowing student-athletes to participate in sports programs that are not offered at their homeschool due to low student enrollments and insufﬁcient numbers. The goal of allowing joint teams is to increase the number of student-athletes that participate in activities.842.0 Two (2) or more member schools may make an application for a Joint Team. If approved student-athletes from those member schools will be able to participate together on the joint team.843.0 Each Application must be made only for team sports and be submitted to the BCSS Ofﬁce by the team registration deadline as outlined in 832.1. Applications received after the deadline are subject to a ﬁne and will not be included in berthing allocations. The application shall:843.1 Be made with regard to member schools that are located in the same local association;843.2 Indicate which speciﬁc team sport; and843.3 Include acknowledgment and support from the member schools’ administration and local association president.844.0 To maintain the competitive balance and ensure a fair ﬁeld of play, a joint school team may be approved but the ability for the team to compete in playoffs, zones and championships may be restricted based on the following:844.1 Member schools who join together and have a combined "category" total of seven (7) or lower as found in Membership Fees Categories (340.0) are eligible to compete in all competition in a BCSS activity (playoffs, zones and provincials);844.2 Member schools who join together and have a combined "category" total of eight (8) or higher as found in Membership Fees Categories (340.0) are not eligible to compete in any post season competition beyond a local or Tier II championship in BCSS activity.845.0 The tiering classiﬁcation of the joint team will be determined by combining the appropriate tiering numbers of the two (2) or more schools forming the joint team.846.0 A joint team may be terminated by written request, before the expiry of the requested time period in the following cases:846.1 Closure of one (1) of the participating schools;846.2 Serious breach of the Bylaws and Policies and Regulations of BCSS of any of the participants; or846.3 When, it is in the best interests of the student athletes of one (1) or more schools.847.0 The decision is ﬁnal and conclusive and shall not be appealed or reviewed in any manner.

Page 98

Page 99

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 99910.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE TRANSFERSA Transfer occurs whenever a student-athlete who is registered at any school (within or outside of BC) transfers and is registered at a different school. A transferring student-athlete who competes on a team at the new school changes the competitive balance that would have been in place prior to the transfer. Consequently, the Legislative Assembly has developed regulations governing the eligibility of student-athletes who transfer schools and wish to participate in interscholastic activities.911.0 ESTABLISHING A STUDENT-ATHLETE’S HOME SCHOOLA student-athlete’s eligibility is tied to their home school. Any student-athlete transferring schools after their home school is established is subject to the transfer policies. The student-athlete’s home school will be established at the member school at which:911.1 A student-athlete plays up to a Senior School (818.1) and is listed on a grade nine, junior or senior team roster or;911.2 The student-athlete registers on the ﬁrst (1st) day of their second year of eligibility (grade 9).912.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE TRANSFERRING AFTER HOME SCHOOL IS ESTABLISHED A student-athlete who transfers after a home school has been established, is ineligible for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of transfer in any BCSS activity in which they competed in the twelve (12) months prior to the date of transfer912.1 A student-athlete who transfers from one school to another school shall not have the right to subsequently transfer to a second school or to subsequently transfer back to their original school and still be eligible for competition in a BCSS activity in the same academic year, without an Eligibility Application.912.2 A member school may only submit one Change of Residence or eligibility application per academic school year per student-athlete.912.3 If a student-athlete transfers due to a member school not offering a sport, the student-athlete is subject to the one-year ineligibility period.912.4 A student-athlete who transfers from their home school to a prep/elite team within or afﬁliated with a school, and return to their home school, or any other BCSS member school, is considered to have participated in that sport and must seek eligibility as a transfer student. Members of a school prep/elite team are considered to have participated in competition of a BCSS activity.913.0 TRANSFER DISCLOSUREThe receiving school is required to truthfully disclose the following as part of the transfer process:913.1 Within the last 24 months prior to enrollment at the receiving school, has the transferring student:913.1.1 Participated in a club or community/non-school athletic program in which one or more of the receiving school’s coaches are currently involved.913.1.2 Received personal athletic instruction or training, including strength and conditioning programming, from a person afﬁliated with the receiving school’s athletic program.913.2 If the answer to the question above is yes, the school ﬁling the transfer submission must list the coach(es) involved and the organizations the coach and student athletes participated with together.913.3 While the Eligibility Ofﬁcer or EAC may consider the information received, a positive response to the question is not automatically disqualifying for the transfer.913.4 BCSS will track the relative frequency at which transfers happen over a 2-year period to further evaluate whether policy in the future is required.920.0 TRANSFER EXEMPTIONSOnce a transfer has occurred the student-athlete must gain eligibility to participate in any interscholastic activity. The Legislative Assembly creates the policies governing the eligibility of students transfers and has approved the following exemptions. Transfer exemptions are circumstances taken into consideration when reviewing eligibility, that may allow a student-athlete to gain eligibility without the 12-month ineligibility period. 921.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE ADVANCING TO A MORE SENIOR SCHOOL921.1 A student-athlete advancing from a middle school or junior secondary school after establishing their home school may proceed to the school into which his/her middle school or junior secondary school normally feeds, without any restrictions.921.2 If the student-athlete attended an independent school not offering senior grades, this student-athlete can transfer to a similar independent school offering senior grades, providing the receiving school is the next closest independent school geographically to where the student-athlete lives. The student-athlete can also advance to a public school offering senior grades, as per the normal catchment boundaries of the school district in which the student- athlete resides.

Page 100

100 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook922.0 NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SCHOOLS, SCHOOL DISTRICT RE-ORGANIZATION OR SCHOOL CLOSURE School districts and/or schools must apply for approval from the BCSS ofﬁce prior to any student-athlete being eligible. A complete list of those student-athletes impacted must be provided to BCSS with the required information.923.0 CHANGE OF RESIDENCE A student-athlete has moved with their parent(s) or legal guardian(s) and changed their principal residence within the previous twelve (12) months. The change of residence must not be deemed to be with the intent of making the student-athlete eligible for competition in a BCSS activity at a member school. The student-athlete does not become eligible under this category until the member school submits the required form that attests to the details and reason for the change of residence. The member school is required to provide evidence/documentation the student-athlete is residing in a new residence that satisﬁes the Eligibility Ofﬁcer. The following must be met in all types of residence change applications (Change in Principal Residence, Parent-to-Parent, Move to Legal Guardian): The student-athlete will remain eligible if they stay enrolled at their current school despite the change of residence. The student-athlete may become eligible:○ If leaving a public school, at the public school into whose catchment boundaries the family or student-athlete has moved to; or○ If leaving a French Immersion Program, at the nearest public school that offers a French immersion program if the student-athlete can provide documentation showing they were previously enrolled in a French immersion program at their leaving school; or○ If leaving an independent school, the nearest independent school that best aligns with the student-athlete's previous school's nature (faith-based, secular) Although a school district may allow out-of-catchment registration for a new-to-district student, this does NOT satisfy the criteria to be deemed athletically eligible.923.1 CHANGE IN PRINCIPAL RESIDENCE In addition to satisfying criteria, as noted in 923.0, a change of principal residence must be bona ﬁde. For a change of residence to be considered bona ﬁde, the following facts must exist:○ The change in residence must not be to make the student-athlete eligible for competition in BCSS activity at the member school;○ The original residence must be abandoned as a residence; (i.e. sold, rented or disposed of as a residence, and must not be used as a residence by another member of the family)○ The entire family must make the change and take with them their household goods and furniture appropriate to the circumstance;○ The change must be made with the intent that it is permanent;○ The student is ineligible to compete for the receiving school until the actual change of residence has occurred.923.2 PARENT-TO-PARENT MOVE The student-athlete must satisfy the criteria as noted in 923.0. Additionally, a parent-to-parent is deﬁned as a student-athlete moving to reside with the parent with whom they have not been living and as a result of the move is required to transfer schools. Only two (2) transfers to move from parent-to-parent are allowed after the ﬁrst (1st) day of the student-athletes ﬁrst (1st) year of eligibility. The residence of the student shall be that of the parent to whom custody has been awarded by a court of competent jurisdiction. If no custody order has been entered, the residence shall be that of the parent who has custody immediately upon separation.923.3 MOVE TO A LEGAL GUARDIAN The student-athlete must satisfy criteria as noted in 923.0, a move to the legal guardian is deﬁned as a student- athlete moving to reside with a legal guardian(s), and as a result, is required to transfer schools. Only two (2) transfers to move to a legal guardian(s) are allowed after the ﬁrst (1st) day of the student-athlete’s ﬁrst (1st) year of eligibility. Legal guardianship must be in place for twelve (12) months before when eligibility is sought.923.3.1 If the student transfers to any other school, the receiving (new) school must submit an Eligibility Application.924.0 DISTRICT ACADEMIC PROGRAMA student-athlete who is enrolled in a recognized district academic program as offered by their school district will be eligible to compete in BCSS activity if they meet all BCSS eligibility requirements and will be able to compete as per 831.0. The district academic program must meet the following conditions:○ The district academic program is a coherent program, not just a series of courses; and○ The program is not a work experience program.

Page 101

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 101○ Student-athletes who are enrolled in the district academic program, TREK or the North Vancouver School District (NVSD) Outdoor Education Academy, for a period of one (1) school year and are returning to their original home school immediately upon the conclusion of the program will remain eligible to compete for their home school.○ If the student-athlete wishes to participate in competition in a BCSS activity for the school hosting the TREK or the NVSD Outdoor Education Academy program, the school must ﬁle an Eligibility Application in accordance with 943.0. If the student-athlete is approved and participates for the host school in a BCSS activity, they will not be eligible at their original school upon return after the conclusion of the district academic program and will be subject to the transfer rules in 910.0.925.0 ALTERNATE PROGRAM/SCHOOLSIf an alternate program or school is an offshoot of a particular member school (home school), and is administered by that home school’s administrator, the student-athlete in the alternate program is eligible to compete for the home school. If a student- athlete transfers to an alternate program administered by a different principal, the move is considered to be a transfer, and transfer restrictions shall apply (822.0).926.0 DESIGNATED SPECIAL EDUCATION SCHOOLSA student-athlete who transfers to a designated Special Education Independent School (as per the Independent School Act and the Ministry of Education) will become eligible at any other designated Special Education Independent School regardless of the catchment area in which they reside. If the student-athlete transfers to a school that is not designated as a Special Education Independent School the student-athlete will be subject to Section 900.0 Student-Athlete Transfers.927.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE TRANSFERRING FROM ALTERNATE SCHOOL OR ONLINE LEARNING SCHOOLA student-athlete who is attending an alternate school in a school district remains eligible upon transfer to the public school in whose catchment area the student-athlete resides; or a student-athlete who is registered at a Ministry of Education online learning school remains eligible upon transfer to the public school in whose catchment area the student-athlete resides 822.0).928.0 SHORT-TERM TRANSFER AND RETURN TO HOME SCHOOLA student-athlete who transfers to another school for a period of one (1) school year or less, and who has not attempted to gain eligibility in any BCSS activity while attending that school, will regain eligibility upon transferring back to their home school.929.0 WARD OF THE PROVINCEThe student-athlete who transfers is a Ward of the Province and whose move has been arranged by the province. The receiving school must submit a letter from the school administrator conﬁrming that the placement has been arranged by the ministry having jurisdiction or the government agency responsible for the student-athlete. This letter will include the time of the move, the location of the new residence, and that participation in school sports was not a factor in the placement, and the receiving school must also conﬁrm that the residence of the family or the residence in which the student-athlete has been placed is within the catchment area boundaries of the school.930.0 STUDENT-ATHLETE TRANSFERS DURING THE MONTH OF SEPTEMBER AS A RESULT OF SCHOOL DISTRICT TRANSFER PROCESS Per Section 74.1 of the School Act, a board must have a protocol in place to allow student movement among schools. Per school district policy, the deadline for application for student transfer is in the spring, prior to the new school year, yet the board reserves the right to make a ﬁnal decision after space and facility availability are known in the month of September. Upon receipt from the district, student-athletes who are forced to move schools as per this district policy will be eligible at their receiving school. 931.0 STUDENT- ATHLETE HAS TRANSFERRED SCHOOLS FOR A BONA FIDE ACADEMIC REASON “Bona ﬁde academic reason” is deﬁned as a minimum of twelve (12) credits (generally equates to three (3) full time courses) In a related program of study in which the student is registered in the current academic year. The program of study is not available to the student-athlete at their previous school. Courses that are directly related to sport or Human Performance, where credits are being issued for the execution of sport training activities, either in a multi-sport, or sport-speciﬁc application will not be eligible for consideration when evaluating the merits for an Eligibility Application, on the grounds of bona ﬁde academic transfer.Where an exemption is granted by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer on the basis of a transfer for an academic reason, the exemption shall cease to have effect if the student-athlete withdraws from the program, group of courses or other academic offerings underlying the exemption, unless and until the Eligibility Ofﬁcer, on written application by the school, conﬁrms the exemption.932.0 THE STUDENT-ATHLETE HAS TRANSFERRED SCHOOLS BECAUSE OF FINANCIAL HARDSHIP“Financial hardship” is deﬁned as a when a student-athlete or their family is willing but unable to meet their obligations because of unexpected events or unforeseen changes that impacts their ﬁnancial viability (i.e. Changes in income or expenditure. Changes in employment status, such as losing a job or having hours reduced).933.0 THE STUDENT-ATHLETE HAS TRANSFERRED SCHOOLS BECAUSE OF BULLYING "Bullying” is deﬁned as unwanted aggressive behaviour that involves real or perceived power imbalance. The behaviour is repeated or has the potential to be repeated over time. In order to be considered bullying, the behaviour must be aggressive

Page 102

102 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbookand include; an Imbalance of Power where kids who bully use their power-such as physical strength, access to embarrassing information, or popularity-to control or harm others. Power imbalances can change over time and in different situations, even if they involve the same people or, Repetition where bullying behaviours happen more than once or have the potential to happen more than once.For consideration by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer, the leaving school must acknowledge in writing the student was subject to actions that meet the standards above while attending their school and believe the transfer to be in the best interest of the student’s overall health and well being.934.0 INDIGENOUS SCHOOL OF CHOICE TRANSFER Students who are members of and reside on-reserve or on Treaty lands consistent with the Indigenous School of Choice provisions of the School Act, may transfer to the designated School of Choice, provided that it has been identiﬁed by the Band or Treaty leadership, in a method that is consistent with legislation, are permitted to transfer to that School of Choice without any period of ineligibility. 934.1 Students may transfer to the Indigenous School of Choice without a period of ineligibility: ○ prior to the academic year beginning in which the school is identiﬁed as the School of Choice,○ during the ﬁrst academic year as the designated School of Choice,○ or prior to the start of the second academic year. Once the second academic year begins as the designated School of Choice, should the student transfer, the student is subject to the transfer policies of BCSS.940.0 TRANSFER PROCESSMember schools may only submit one eligibility submission per student-athlete, per academic year. An eligibility submission is done through the use of a Change of Residence Form or an Eligibility Application. 941.0 CHANGE OF RESIDENCE FORMA Change of Residence Form is required when a student-athlete changes their residence and must be authorized by the school administrator and signed by student-athlete’s and parent(s) or legal guardian(s). Change of Residence Forms must be submitted within 12 months of the date of move. Change of Residence Forms shall be submitted for; ○ A Parent-to-Parent move, ○ Move to a Legal Guardian or; ○ Change of Principal Residency 941.1 Should a member school submit a Change of Residence which is denied by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer(s); the member school may appeal the decision directly to the Eligibility Appeals Committee as per 644.0. 941.2 After a ruling where eligibility is approved and where subsequently the Executive Director receives new information pertaining to the student-athlete in question that they deem credible and has the potential to affect the original decision, the Executive Director may request the Eligibility Ofﬁcer to review the ruling in light of the new information, and if they deem necessary, issue a new ruling.942.0 NOTIFICATION OF TRANSFER FORM This form conﬁrms a transfer of a student-athlete and eligibility in sports not participated in the last 12 months. A Notiﬁcation of Transfer form must be signed and submitted by the administrator and athletic director of the receiving school and the student-athletes parent(s) or legal guardian(s) for the transfer to be completed.943.0 ELIGIBILITY APPLICATION943.1 Where a student-athlete is ineligible for BCSS competition pursuant to BCSS policy, the member school may apply for exemption for the student-athlete in accordance with this section. An Eligibility Application under 642.0 must be submitted to the Eligibility Ofﬁcer (EO) through the BCSS ofﬁce and shall contain:○ A completed and signed BCSS Eligibility Application;○ Disclosure of the eligibility application to the leaving school including reference to the eligibility rule upon which the application is based;○ A copy of the student-athlete’s personal record card (public schools), or report cards and transcripts (independent schools);○ A list of the student-athlete’s current courses;○ A letter from the student-athlete’s parent or legal guardian supporting the application;○ Copies of relevant medical documentation where the application is based on medical grounds; and○ Any other information or clarifying material relevant to the student-athletes eligibility943.2 The applicant school will be invoiced a $50 non-refundable application fee.

Page 103

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 103943.3 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer may request further information from applicant school.943.4 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer may use information as available to them in their capacity as the Eligibility Ofﬁcer of BC School Sports, or otherwise publicly available to assist in the rendering of a decision.943.5 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer may request further information from other parties deemed relevant by the EO. Any information received for consideration under 642.0 will be disclosed to the applying member school, with an invitation for response from the applying school, prior to rendering a decision.943.6 There is no right to teleconference or oral hearing before the Eligibility Ofﬁcer.943.7 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer shall thoroughly evaluate the submissions for completeness and veracity. They shall then consider the information in the application against the Bylaws and Policies. The primary purpose of the eligibility process is to promote fair and equitable competition for all student-athletes participating in BCSS competition. 943.7.1 If in the opinion of the Eligibility Ofﬁcer, a student-athlete transfer is motivated by sport, and has previously established their home school, the Eligibility Ofﬁcer may deny eligibility on those grounds. 943.7.2 The Eligibility Ofﬁcer shall issue a written ruling to the applicant school (to the attention of the administrator and the athletic director) either approving or denying the application and containing a brief summary of the reasons for the decision. 943.7.3 After a ruling where eligibility is approved and where subsequently the Executive Director receives new information pertaining to the student-athlete in question that they deem credible and has the potential to affect the original decision, the Executive Director may request the Eligibility Ofﬁcer to review the ruling in light of the new information, and if they deem necessary, issue a new ruling.943.8 Subject to 942.0, if the Eligibility Ofﬁcer allows the application, the student athlete becomes eligible for competition on the date the decision is issued, provided, however, that the student-athlete’s eligibility remains otherwise subject to the Bylaws and Policies.943.9 It is the responsibility of the applicant school to notify the student-athlete and the student-athlete’s parent(s) or legal guardian(s) of the decision of the Eligibility Ofﬁcer and of any requests or other communications from the Eligibility Ofﬁcer.944.0 ELIGIBILITY APPEALS Should a member school apply for a waiver of the one-year ineligibility period under the Transfer Policy (912.0) through the use of a Change of Residence or Eligibility Application and the request is denied by the Eligibility Ofﬁcer(s); the member school may appeal the decision to the Eligibility Appeals Committee (EAC). An appeal under 944.0 shall be in writing and submitted to the BCSS ofﬁce by 2:00pm (PT) for forwarding to the committee three (3) full days before the next schedules meeting of the EAC.944.1 The Appeal may contain:○ A completed and signed BCSS Eligibility Appeal Form;○ Additional information in response to the Eligibility Ofﬁcer(s) ruling 944.2 The member school appealing will be invoiced a $250 appeal fee; where $200 is refunded upon successful appeal decision.944.3 The EAC may request further information from the applicant school.944.4 The EAC may use information as available to them in their capacity as a committee of BC School Sports, or otherwise publicly available to assist in the rendering of a decision.944.5 The EAC may request further information from other parties deemed relevant by the EAC. Any information received for consideration under 944.4 will be disclosed to the applying member school, with an invitation for response from the applying school, prior to rendering a decision.944.6 There is no right to a teleconference or oral hearing before the EAC.944.7 The EAC shall thoroughly evaluate the Eligibility Appeal submissions for completeness and veracity. The committee shall then consider the information in the application and shall approve or dismiss the appeal, having regard of the Purposes, Bylaws and Policies of BCSS.944.8 The EAC may substitute its views for that of the Eligibility Ofﬁcer and is granted authority to make exceptions to the Bylaws and Policies of BCSS.944.9 The EAC shall issue a written ruling to the applicant school (to the attention of the administrator and the athletic director) either approving or dismissing the appeal, and containing a brief summary of the reasons for the decisions.

Page 104

104 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook944.9.1 After a ruling where eligibility is approved and where subsequently the Executive Director receives new information pertaining to the student-athlete in question that they deem credible and has the potential to affect the original decision, the Executive Director may request the EAC to review the ruling in light of the new information, and if they deem necessary, issue a new ruling.944.10 Subject to 944.6, if the EAC allows the appeal, the student-athlete becomes eligible for competition on the date the decision is issued, provided, however, that the student-athlete’s eligibility remains otherwise subject to the BCSS Bylaws Policies. 944.11 It is the responsibility of the applicant school to notify the student-athlete and the student-athlete’s parent(s) or legal guardian(s) of the decision of the EAC and of any requests or other communications from the EAC.944.12 Where an exemption is granted by the EAC on the basis of a transfer for an academic reason, the exemption shall cease to have effect if the student-athlete withdraws from the program, group of courses or other academic offering underlying the exemption, unless and until the EAC, on written application by the school, conﬁrms the exemption.944.13 The decisions of the EAC under 944.0 and the Eligibility Ofﬁcer under 943.0 are ﬁnal and binding and shall not be questioned or reviewed in any court or tribunal, and no order shall be made or process entered or proceeding taken in any court or tribunal whether by way of injunction, declaration, prohibition or otherwise to question, review, prohibit or restrain the proceedings.944.14 The Eligibility Appeals Committee will meet in 2024-2025 as noted below:DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION TUESDAYS  2:00PM MEETINGS SATURDAYSSeptember 10, 2024 September 14, 2024September 17, 2024 September 21, 2024October 1, 2024 October 5, 2024October 15, 2024 October 19, 2024November 19, 2024 November 23, 2024December 3, 2024 December 7, 2024January 14, 2025 January 18, 2025February 18, 2025 February 22, 2025April 1, 2025 April 5, 2025April 29, 2025 May 3, 2025

Page 105

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1051010.0 AQUATICS1011.0 Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 15 Week 5: Sept 3 Week 15: Nov 15-16 1 Fall2025/26 15 Week 5: Sept 2 Week 15: Nov 14-15 1 Fall2026/27 15 Week 6: Sept 8 Week 16: Nov. 20-21 1 Fall1012.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules governing BCSS Aquatics shall follow those of Swimming Canada with the following modiﬁcations; 1012.1 One Start Rule There will be one start signal for each race. Should an athlete start the race before the signal they will be disqualiﬁed. There will be no restart, the race will continue on the single start for those who started legally. 1012.2 Relay Rules○ All relay events must have four (4) different athletes from the same school○ Mixed relays must consist of two (2) male athletes and two (2) female athletes, mixed relays from two single- gendered schools are prohibited○ Any athlete who competes at zones is permitted to swim on a relay team at provincials○ The order on the relay card is the order that the swimmers MUST use in the race. Failure to swim in the same order will result in a disqualiﬁcation○ No more than 2 teams for each school will be allowed to compete at provincials in each relay event 1012.3 Equipment○ No swimmer shall be permitted to use or wear any device or swimwear that may increase their speed, buoyancy or endurance during a competition (ie. non-textile materials, webbed gloves, ﬂippers, ﬁns, power bands or adhesive substances). Goggles may be worn. ○ As a result of injury, a student-athlete is permitted to tape not more than one or two ﬁngers or toes; any other kind of tape on the body is not permitted unless approved by the Head Referee.○ Student-athletes may wear only plain, generically patterned, or school branded swim caps. No club or event caps will be permitted.○ No electronic pacing devices are permitted.1012.4 Swimmers will be classiﬁed as “A”, “B” or “Para” swimmers according to the following criteria:1012.4.1 “A” Swimmers are deﬁned as:○ A student-athlete with an SNC (Swimming Natation Canada) number who competes in a Winter Swim Meet September 1 - April 30 of the previous school year, OR September 1 to the date of the BCSS Provincial Championship in the current school year.○ A student-athlete who trains at a Swim Academy.1012.4.2 “B” Swimmers are deﬁned as:○ As of January 1st of the championship year, the swimmer trains and competes from May 1st to September 1st with no restrictions.○ Any student-athlete that does not ﬁt the 'A' Swimmer deﬁnition and who trains and competes only from May 1st to September 1st. (Coaches are reminded that if a 'B' swimmer competes in any meet between September 1 and the date of the BCSS Provincial Aquatics Championship in that school year, they are no longer a 'B' swimmer).○ A student-athlete who does not possess an active SNC number.1012.4.3 “Para” Swimmers are deﬁned as:○ Swimmers with a disability, they are not required to be classiﬁed or have an SNC number.

Page 106

106 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1012.4.4 Exceptions○ “B” Swimmers may compete in any A Category event as the BCSS Aquatics Championships is not SNC sanctioned. No SNC number is required. ○ “A” swimmers cannot compete in any B Category event.○ “B” swimmers may compete in A or B category relays, but may not swim the same relay in both A and B categories.1013.0 OFFICIALSOfﬁcials at the BCSS Aquatics Provincial Championship will be certiﬁed Swim BC Ofﬁcials. 1014.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 1014.1 EVENTS1014.1.1 The following events will be contested in the “B” competition category in both girls and boys: ○ 50 Freestyle○ 50 Backstroke○ 50 Breastroke○ 50 Butterﬂy○ 100 Freestyle○ 100 IM○ 200 Medley Relay○ 200 Freestyle Relay○ 400 Freestyle Relay○ 200 Mixed Medley Relay○ 200 Mixed Freestyle Relay1014.1.2 The following events will be contested in the “A” competition category in both girls and boys: ○ 50 Freestyle○ 100 Backstroke○ 100 Breastroke○ 100 Butterﬂy○ 100 Freestyle○ 200 IM○ 200 Medley Relay○ 200 Freestyle Relay○ 400 Freestyle Relay○ 200 Mixed Medley Relay○ 200 Mixed Freestyle Relay1014.1.3 The following events will be contested in para categories: ○ 50 Freestyle○ 50 Backstroke○ 50 Breastroke○ 50 Butterﬂy○ 100 Freestyle○ 100 IM1014.1.4 All swimmers are limited to a total of 4 events, including relays and listed alternate entries.1014.1.5 Any swimmer who competes at a zone meet is eligible to swim on a relay at Provincial Championships.1014.1.6 A swimmer may not scratch from an individual event at provincial in order to move into a relay event.1014.1.7 Relay team swimmers may be changed between the zone meet and Provincial Championships but not between heats and ﬁnals at Provincials, unless a designated alternate is being used.

Page 107

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1071014.2 BERTHINGZone representation berthing (number of entries) is based on the numbers-based-allocation formula determined by BC School Sports. A maximum of two (2) relay teams per school per event are permitted to advance to provincials. Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Eligible Berths *If a zone does not have any teams participating that berth will go back into the total number of eligible berths.Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio1014.3 CHAMPIONSHIP STRUCTURE The Championship meet will consist of preliminary and ﬁnal heats in each event. Individual and relay events will include a championship ﬁnal (1-8) and a consolation ﬁnal (9-16).Heats will be determined by the championship host committee with collaboration with the BCSS ofﬁce based on entry times from zones.1014.3.1 ScratchesA swimmer may not scratch an individual event at provincials in order to move into a relay event, if a swimmer scratches in an individual event they will be disqualiﬁed for any relay events. If a coach decides to scratch an athlete after the designated time they will be ﬁned $50 for an empty lane fee. 1014.3.2 AlternatesListed alternates will not be accepted later than 30 minutes before the start of the meet.1014.4 SCORINGIndividual Events1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th20 18 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 6 5 4 3 2 1Relay Events1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th40 36 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 16 12 10 8 6 4 2PARAScoring is a reverse format and based on the number of swimmers in each event.Example: ○ 8 Swimmers: 20 -18 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11○ 4 Swimmers: 14 - 13 - 12 - 11○ 1 Swimmer: 111014.4 AWARDS (PER TIER/PER GENDER)○ BCSS Championship Banners will be awarded to:○ Senior Boys Team Aggregate Winner; A, AA, AAA○ Senior Girls Team Aggregate Winner; A, AA, AAA○ Gold, Silver and Bronze medals will be awarded to the top 3 ﬁnishers in each event1017.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that most member schools do not have the facilities to host an aquatics championship, and therefore need to book 3rd party facilities to host the championships. The facility chosen as the host location for the championship must abide by the up-to-date Swimming Canada minimum standard facility guidelines.= Berthing Ratio= Number of Berths/Zone

Page 108

108 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1020.0 BADMINTON1021.0 YearMax. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersMax. Numbers for ChampionshipSeason of Play2024/25 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 29-316 8 Spring2025/26 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 28-306 8 Spring2026/27 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 3-56 8 Spring1022.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules governing BCSS Badminton shall be those of the Badminton World Federation with the following modiﬁcations; 1022.1 Pre-Match & Game Procedures/Understanding 1022.1.1 Before commencing a match, players determine the starting player or team via a “Bird Drop” of which the winner has the choice of either: serving ﬁrst, receiving ﬁrst, or side of court1022.1.2 All games will be rally point to 21 points, if the score gets to 20 - 20, then the match will continue until one player or team wins by 2 points. At 29 all the ﬁrst team to 30 wins1022.1.3 A tie is comprised of 7 matches with each match consisting of the best 2 out of 3 games. The winning team is the one that wins 4 or more matches in the tie1022.1.4 A match will begin 5 minutes after it has been announced for play, in which during the 5-minute period, the players can warm up. 1022.1.5 Coaches must submit their BCSS Badminton Score Sheet Line up to the score desk no fewer than ten (10) minutes prior to the start of each tie1022.1.6 Coaches must designate one individual on the Badminton Score Sheet Line up as the coach1022.1.7 Within a tie, an athlete can play in up to two matches. A student-athlete who plays in a singles match (Match 1 or 2), may only play in the Doubles C (Match 7) pairing. An athlete in the doubles pairing (either A or B) must play both matches with the same pairing. (eg: student-athlete cannot play Doubles A pairing and then play in Doubles B pairing in the same tie. For the Doubles C pairing, coaches may choose to play the one or both of the student-athletes from the singles matches, or they may choose one or two different student-athletes, that have not played in that tie. (ie. cannot choose a player who played in Doubles A or B pairings)1022.2 Players cannot leave the court between games at any time, are required to clearly announce the score between each service and while on the court to communicate any issues with the designated coach for the tie. 1022.3 Coaches1022.3.1 Teams are limited to a maximum of two (2) head coaches and two (2) assistant coaches. All coaches must be designated on the score sheet and registered in STARS. Only designated head coaches as listed on the Badminton Score Sheet Line up are permitted to coach in-between rallies and must not interfere with ﬂow of the game. 1022.3.2 Assistant coaches are permitted to coach players directly only during the two (2) minute break between games. Assistant coaches may provide feedback to the head coach throughout the match. 1022.4 Intervals at 11:○ Players have the discretion to take a 60-second water break in any game when the ﬁrst player reaches 11 points.○ Players will switch sides when the ﬁrst player reaches 11 in the third game of a match, however no on court coaching will be allowed.1022.5 The contact height of a shuttle and racquet during service should be below the lowest rib. If a player is consistently serving illegally, and the breach is blatant, the coach noting the infraction is to speak to the player’s coach, and request to warn the player. If in the opinion of a coach, the service rules continue to be breached, then a service ruling can be requested and organized by other neutral coaches/managers within that pool or playoff group. 1022.6 Schools must have a minimum of six (6) girls OR six (6) boys in order to ﬁeld a team in either respective gender. Declare eligible players on the “Team Line Up” form • List players in order of strength • Attach BCSS Roster to “Team Line Up” form

Page 109

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1091022.7 Alternates1022.7.1 If a player is injured in a match and cannot play within reasonable time (approximately ﬁve (5) minutes) they will default the match1022.7.2 A substitute may play in the remaining match of the injured player as long as it is changed with the scorekeeper and the opposing teams coach is notiﬁed. This match is considered as an ofﬁcial match in the Tie1022.7.3 The team must default at least one match in the Tie that a player cannot continue, and the injured player cannot play in a different match in that same tie. 1022.7.4 A player who is injured in a Tie does not preclude them from participating in any remaining Ties1023.0 EQUIPMENT1023.1 Shoes appropriate for court play that are constructed of non-marking soles1023.2 Players must wear appropriate badminton attire that consists of a shirt and shorts. Ofﬁcial school team uniforms or clothing are mandatory.1023.3 Generally speaking, as a sign of fair play, it is asked not to wear a sweatshirt and/or sweatpants during match play.1023.4 Unless stated otherwise, the Yonex Mavis 300 will be the ofﬁcial shuttlecock of the championships. 1024.0 OFFICIALSAll ofﬁciating at BCSS badminton events will be self-ofﬁciated by players1024.1 Players are to only call the lines on their own side of the court1024.2 Calls are to be immediate and assertive with no help from the spectators1024.3 If a player has a doubt, the request for an umpire or line judge is through the designated coach in-between games1024.4 Umpires and line judges are to be organized by other neutral coaches/managers within that pool or playoff group1024.5 Spectators must behave in a manner that does not interfere with any communication by ofﬁcials and players on the court. 1025.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 1025.1 EVENTS1025.1.1 All players must play in their designated position for the completion of the tie1025.1.2 If a team does not have a minimum of ﬁve (5) players listed at the time of the “Line Up” submission, the school will default the matches the missing players would have played1025.1.3 A different set of players may be used on next and subsequent ties1025.1.4 After six (6) matches have been won/lost, the designated coach can change their line up with the knowledge of the other coach and the draw desk with no penalty.1025.2 BERTHING1025.2.1 Schools can qualify both a boys’ team and/or a girls’ team for participation in the championships. Each gender will qualify individually through their zone championship. Each zone will be allocated a minimum of one (1) berth and the host school where applicable will receive an automatic berth. The following procedure will be used to determine the allocation of remaining at large berths: Zones receive the whole number of berths closest to their allocation provided that:• Each BCSS zone receives one non-host berth• No zone receives more than 4 berths* (not including host school)• This process allocates the appropriate number of total berths *If a zone does not ﬁll all of its allocated berths, the unused spots will be redistributed to zones with the strongest historical performance over the past 5 championships. These additional berths can be awarded to zones that have already received 4 berths.Number of Registered SchoolsNon-Assigned Berths at Tournament= Berthing RatioNumber of Zone RegistrantsBerth Ratio= Zone Allocation

Page 110

Page 111

Page 112

112 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1030.0 BASKETBALL1031.0 BOYSYear Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 32 Week 17: Nov. 25 Week 31: Mar. 5-8 7 Winter2025/26 32 Week 17: Nov. 24 Week 31: Mar. 4-7 7 Winter2026/27 32 Week 18: Nov. 30 Week 32: Mar. 10-13 7 WinterGIRLSYear Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 32 Week 17: Nov. 25 Week 30: Feb. 26 - Mar. 1 7 Winter2025/26 32 Week 17: Nov. 24 Week 30: Feb. 25-28 7 Winter2026/27 32 Week 18: Nov. 30 Week 31: Mar. 3-6 7 Winter1032.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules for governing BCSS Basketball shall be Federal International Basketball Association (FIBA) with the following modiﬁcations:1032.1 Thirty (30) shot clock, full reset after the ball strokes the ring. Teams are required to advance the ball across the half court time in no more than ten (10) seconds.1032.2 All throw-ins as part of any unsportsmanlike foul or disqualifying foul, shall be administered from the frontcourt throw-in spot. In all cases, the team awarded the throw-in shall have:•Eighteen (18) seconds on the shot clock1032.3 Shot Clock1032.3.1 Following a foul or violation against the team in control of the ball, the opponent shall be awarded a throw in: ○ Occurring in the backcourt - reset to thirty (30) seconds ○ Occurring in the frontcourt - reset to eighteen (18) seconds 1032.3.2 During the last two (2) minutes of the game - when a time-out is awarded in offensive team’s backcourt, the coach has the option of retaining possession in their team’s backcourt or moving the ball to the throw-in spot in the front court. 1032.3.2.1 Following the time-out, the Head Coach must immediately inform the closest ofﬁcial which option is to be taken. Failure to do so - the throw-in shall remain in the team’s backcourt. ○ Backcourt throw-in after an opponent’s foul, violation, or legal score: thirty (30) seconds ○ Advanced to the frontcourt – if more than 18 seconds: eighteen (18) seconds○ Advanced to the frontcourt - no reset if less than eighteen (18) seconds1032.4 Technical Foul: One (1) free throw to be administered immediately (but following a time-out, if applicable). Following the Technical foul free throw(s), play to resume: ball returns to the team which was in control of the ball or to the team entitled to the ball.1032.5 Ball lodges between the ring and backboard, the shot clock is reset to: thirty (30) seconds 1032.6 FIBA pre-game warm-up procedure shall NOT be used.1032.7 Home team (or as designated by the tournament) shall have choice of team benches and will shoot at the basket furthest from that bench in the ﬁrst half1032.8 Each team shall be permitted their three (3) allotted time-outs at any time during the second half. A maximum of two (2) time-outs in the ﬁnal two (2) minutes of the fourth (4th) period no longer applies. Unused time-outs shall not be carried over to any extra period.1032.9 Under no circumstance shall any video system be used for an ofﬁcial, coach, game director or administration to clarify

Page 113

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 113 any on-court rules interpretation. Replay and video may be used when reviewing (an) event(s) for the purposes of discipline.1032.10 Teams must be on the ﬁeld of play ready to play (with the required number of players) within ten (10) minutes of game time. Failure to do so will result in forfeiture. Referees will inform the Tournament Director after ten (10) minutes of game time which team defaulted.1032.11 A disqualiﬁed player is required to leave the ﬁeld of play, meaning the competition gymnasium. If no suitable supervision is available for the student-athlete, the player may remain on the bench but may not communicate with other members of the team or the ofﬁcials.1032.12 The scoresheet should be completed and signed by both coaches with at least ﬁve (5) minutes remaining in the warm-up period.1033.0 EQUIPMENT1033.1 Ball○ The Championship Ball is the Molten G4500 Series (29.5 for Boys, 28.5 for Girls) 1033.2 Uniforms○ T-shirts worn under the uniforms shall be permitted, and the t-shirt worn may be any colour, provided that all players choosing to wear a t-shirt, must be wearing a t-shirt of the same colour. Compression wear such as arm sleeves, leggings or compression shorts may be any colour. 1034.0 OFFICIALSAll BCSS Basketball Provincials will be ofﬁciated by certiﬁed ofﬁcials of the BC Basketball Ofﬁcials Commission.1035.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1035.1 EVENTS There will be eight (8) BCSS Basketball Provincial Championships. Each championship, as listed below will consist of a 16-team tournament. 1035.1.1 Girls: A; Girls AA; Girls AAA; Girls AAAA1035.1.2 Boys A; Boys AA; Boys AAA; Boys AAAA1035.2 BERTHING1035.2.1 Boys Basketball Berthing○Each of the nine (9) BCSS zones will receive one berth ○7 additional berths will be allocated based on the percentage of active senior programs in each BCSS zoneTotal Number Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Available Berths * If a zone does not have any teams participating that berth will go back into the total number of at-large berthsTotal Number Schools with Registered TeamsTeam/Zone Berthing Ratio○ Zones that, after receiving their zone champion berth, that do not have enough teams per the berthing ratio to receive a second berth, will be removed from the process, and the remaining berths will be allocated using a second ratio of only the remaining zones.1035.2.2 Girls Basketball Berthing○ Qualiﬁcation for the tournament will happen at the zone level.○ Teams who win their Zone Championship will automatically have a spot in Provincials (9 teams), another berth will be awarded to the host school (if applicable). The remaining at-large berths will be allocated as followed: = Berthing Ratio= Number of Berths/Zone

Page 114

114 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook• Two (2) berths, to the two zones (one berth per zone) with the highest number of registered teams• If two or more zones are tied with the number of registered teams for the 2nd largest zone, each zone will receive a berth.• Remaining berths will be awarded at the discretion of the seeding committee based on evaluating each zone’s team strength. • Play in games/half-berths are still permitted and their use is at the discretion of the applicable berthing committee If a zone does not have any registered teams in a particular tier, their berth will be awarded by the seeding committee. BC School Sports will announce the zones that receive the berths based on registered teams shortly after the Winter Team Registration Deadline. BC School Sports with the seeding committee will announce the remaining berth allocations in advance of zone tournaments commencing play (generally early-to-mid February).1036.3 STRUCTURE1036.3.1 Boys and Girls Basketball StructureAll Provincial Tournaments shall consist of sixteen (16) teams.○ The Provincial Tournament shall be played over four (4) days1036.3.2 BOYS AND GIRLS CHAMPIONSHIP DRAW 1036.4 CHAMPIONSHIP SEEDING○ The seeding committee in cooperation with BCSS and the Tournament Directors shall seed the championship draw based on the established philosophy and guidelines for championship seeding, and will include evaluating exhibition, invitational, league, playoff and zone competition. ○ The seeding committee will be appointed by BCSS at the recommendation of the SAC Chair and Tournament Director 1037.0 AWARDS○ A BCSS Championship Banner will be awarded to the winning team of each championship (4 events) ○ Gold, Silver and Bronze medals will be awarded to the top 3 teams of each tournament. Each team will be provided 15 medals. (Additional medals can be purchased through BCSS)

Page 115

Page 116

116 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1040.0 CROSS COUNTRY1041.0 Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersMaximum Roster (@ Provincials)Season of Play2024/25 15 Week 5: Sept 3 Week 14: Nov. 2 1 7 Fall2025/26 15 Week 5: Sept 2 Week 13: Nov. 1 1 7 Fall2026/27 15 Week 6: Sept 8 Week 14: Nov. 7 1 7 Fall1042.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules governing BCSS Cross Country shall be those of BC Athletics with the following rule modiﬁcations; 1042.1 Athletes are required to compete at one sanctioned school league cross country meet before participating in zone championships1042.2 Athletes must qualify to Provincial Championships through their Zone Championship Meet1042.2.1 If an athlete is moved to a higher tier for the zone championship and fails to qualify through the zone meet to the provincial championship then that athlete is not permitted to move back down to a lower tier with their school team. 1042.2.1.1 If an athlete qualiﬁes for the provincials at a higher tier than their school team in the same provincials, that athlete's results will not be scored for the school team's results.1042.2.2 An athlete may be allowed to compete at Provincial Championships without having qualiﬁed In their Zone Championships given exceptional circumstances. Tournament Director & three (3) elected representatives will rule on whether an athlete qualiﬁes based on exceptional circumstances.1042.2.3 An application for exemption must be emailed by the appropriate zone representative to BC School Sports on the Friday, eight days before the Provincial Championship event1042.2.4 The Championship committee along with the BCSS Ofﬁce will use the following criteria to determine qualiﬁcation;○ Runner must have top twenty-ﬁve (25) potential at Provincials - they should be a top ﬁve (5) runner in league races during the season, smaller zones - top three (3).○ Exceptional circumstances may include;•A serious trafﬁc issue (car accident or delayed ferry) • A funeral• Medical issues, including serious illnessesNote: Conﬂict with another sport, an exam, a school ﬁeld trip, or a family event does not qualify as an exceptional circumstance1042.2.5 Any decision made by the Championship Committees ﬁnal, if qualiﬁcation is granted the athlete must represent their school at the BCSS Provincial Championships.1042.3 The start line should be straight/arched and at least seventy meters (70m) wide to accommodate ﬁfty-ﬁve chutes (55) of 1.25 meter width and long enough to channel runners safely into the course.1042.4 The start and ﬁnish chute should be around the same area and should extend for at least two hundred and ﬁfty (250) meters without narrowing, turning, or ascending/descending a hill.1042.5 The ﬁnish line should be ﬁve (5) meters wide with the chute narrowing approximately to one (1) meter at about ﬁfteen (15) meters past the ﬁnish line and extending approximately forty (40) meters1042.6 The course should be able to handle approximately three hundred (300) runners per race and should be wide enough for at least three (3) runners side by side, or approximately ﬁve (5) meters to allow for passing.1042.7 No league meets can take place within 5 days of the zone championship 1042.8 All runners must compete in the same age category at Zone and Provincial Championships1043.0 EQUIPMENT1043.1 BCSS Cross Country Championship bibs must be worn and visible at all times during the competition.

Page 117

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1171043.2 Athletes must have matching school uniforms, no club representation will be permitted.1044.0 OFFICIALSAll BCSS Cross Country Championships will use Chip Timing as their ofﬁcial. Chips are embedded in the athletes bibs and are to be picked up by the athlete when arriving at Provincials. Coaches are not permitted to have any chips on them at any time throughout the competition. For purposes of calculating results, athletes are required to wear the timing chip at all times once they are lined up for their race.1045.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1045.1 EVENTS The BCSS Cross Country Championships will be comprised of 9 races: • Junior Boys (4km) • Junior Girls (4km) • Para (2km) • 1A Girls (4.5-5.5km) • 1A Boys (4.5-5.5km) • 2A Boys (4.5-5.5km) • 2A Girls (4.5-5.5km) • 3A Girls (4.5-5.5km) • 3A Boys (4.5-5.5km)1045.1.1 If the 1A race (boys and/or girls) does not reach a minimum start list of 100 for the provincial championship, that race(s) will be combined with the 2A race.1045.2 ASSIGNMENT OF STARTING LINE CHUTES Runners from each zone and associated schools are to be positioned by number from left to right facing the running area. Numbers will be assigned to both individuals and teams from each zone on a yearly rotating basis.1045.3 BERTHING TEAM BERTHS• 15 team berths for 1A• 20 team berths for 2A• 27 team berths for 3A• The zone champion team in each tier will receive an automatic berth. Remaining berths will be awarded to the zones, based on the berthing ratio of the previous 5-year rolling average of teams competing at zone championships. INDIVIDUAL BERTHS Individual berths are awarded for the highest ﬁnishing, non-team qualifying athletes in each tier. • 27 Individual Berths for 1A• Each zone automatically receives 2 individual berths, remaining 9 are distributed based on berthing ratio (5-year average at zones)• 36 Individual Berths for 2A• Each zone automatically receives 2 individual berths, remaining 18 are distributed based on berthing ratio (5-year average of total runners at zone race) • 50 Individual Berths for 3A• Each Zone automatically receives 3 individual berths, remaining 18 individual berths are distributed based on berthing ratio (5-year average of total runners at zone race) To ensure a minimum standard of competitive running, and to maintain the time schedule at provincial championships, all qualifying runners must complete their zone race in a pace of 6:15min/km (exact time set dependent on each zone course.) For example, if the zone course is measured at 5.5km, the time required to qualify is 34:23 or better. If the course is measured at 4.5 km the pace the required time would be 28:08. Once the zone course is set, the qualifying time should be noted by the zone meet director prior to the race to all coaches and competitors.1045.4 SCORING A: MAXIMUM 5 RUNNERS ON A TEAM, SCORE FIRST 3 FINISHERS.

Page 118

118 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook AA: MAXIMUM 7 RUNNERS ON A TEAM, SCORE FIRST 4 FINISHERS. AAA: MAXIMUM 7 RUNNERS ON A TEAM, SCORE FIRST 4 FINISHERS.• Student-athletes running with a qualiﬁed team will score for their team based on the criteria above. Student-athletes running with a qualiﬁed team that ﬁnish but do not score will displace scoring runners from other teams in the same race (tier).• Individual runners do not displace team runners, nor accrue points, and are simply judged on their ﬁnishing time for individual results. • Scoring student-athletes on a qualiﬁed team will receive points equal to their placing of all team runners in their tier. The team with the lowest score amongst their scoring athletes is the team Champion in their tier. 1045.5 TIE BREAK PROCEDURE A tie between 2 teams is broken by the ﬁnishing position of the 4th runner on the team. (3rd for the 'A' tier).1046.0 AWARDS○ BCSS will award six (6) banners which are: ‘A’ Girls Champions, ‘A’ Boys Champions”, ‘AA’ Girls Champions” and ‘AA’ Boys Champions and ‘AAA’ Girls Champions and ‘AAA’ Boys Champions”.○ Rosettes for 4th-6th place ﬁnishing teams in each race○ Ribbons for the 4th-10th individual ﬁnishers in each race○ Photo Plaques to top 3 teams in each race○ BCSS Medals for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd place team ﬁnishers○ BCSS Medals for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd place runners in each race1047.0 CHAMPIONSHIP FACILITY REQUIREMENTS○ Start line should be straight and at least ﬁfty (50) meters wide to accommodate 40 starting chutes of 1.25 meters wide○ The start and ﬁnish chute should be around the same area and should extend for at least two hundred (200) meters without narrowing, turning or ascending/descending a hill. ○ The ﬁnish line should be ﬁve meters wide, and the ﬁnishing chute should narrow no sooner than 15m past the ﬁnish line, and should extend a minimum of 40m past the ﬁnish line.○ The course should be able to handle approximately two-hundred and ﬁfteen (215) runners and should be wide enough for three athletes to run shoulder to shoulder or approximately 5m to allow for passing

Page 119

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1191050.0 CURLING1051.0 Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersMaximum Roster for ChampionshipSeason of Play2024/25 15 Week 17: Nov. 25 Week 30: Feb. 26 - Mar. 1 4 7 Winter2025/26 15 Week 17: Nov. 24 Week 30: Feb. 25-28 4 7 Winter2026/27 15 Week 18: Nov. 30 Week 31: Mar. 3-6 4 7 Winter1052.0 RULESThe rules governing BCSS Curling shall follow those of Curling Canada with the following modiﬁcations; 1052.1 Each match will be 8 ends1053.0 OFFICIALS Ofﬁcials at BCSS Championships will be Curl BC ofﬁcials, no lower than a certiﬁed level 2.1054.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP1054.1 EVENTS BCSS will conduct a provincial championship, for boys’ teams and girls’ teams, respectively1054.2 BERTHING The BCSS Curling Provincial Championship will have 10 berths in each the boys and girl’s category. 9 berths will be awarded to the zone champions in each of the 9 BCSS zones. The remaining 1 berth will be awarded to the host school. If a zone is unable to or chooses not to ﬁll their berth, the vacated berth will be awarded to the next highest ﬁnisher of the zone with the highest number of active senior programs.1054.3 STRUCTURE The championship will be dependent on the number of teams attending the championship, and ultimately will be determined by BCSS staff, in consultation with the Event Host and the Curling Advisory Committee. If 8 or fewer teams, the event will consist of a round robin, with each team playing every other team in the tournament once. The team with the best win-loss record at the end of the round robin play will be the provincial champion. Should there be more than 8 teams attending, the event may be run with pool play, feeding into an elimination bracket.1054.4 TIE BREAK PROCEDURE If time allows, where there is a tie for 1st place after the round robin, the tied teams will compete in a tie breaking game. If at the discretion of the tournament director there is insufﬁcient time for a tie breaking game, the winner will be determined by using the head-to-head result of the tied teams from their round robin match.1054.5 AWARDS (Per gendered competition) ○ BCSS Blue Provincial Championship Banner○ 6 Gold, 6 Silver and 6 Bronze Medals○ Zone Patches for teams placing 4th-10th○ Provincial Champion Patches for 1st- 3rd place teams○ Perpetual Trophies for 1st, 2nd, and 3rd place1055.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that most member schools do not have the facilities to host a curling championship, and therefore need to book 3rd party facilities to host the championships. The facility chosen as the host location for the championship must have at minimum 6 sheets of ice, however 9 sheets is ideal. Four sheet rinks may have to be used when no other facilities are available in a speciﬁc zone.If your school plans on submitting a bid to host a BCSS Curling Championship and wants clariﬁcation on if your chosen facility has all of the requirements, please reach out to the BCSS ofﬁce for further clariﬁcation.

Page 120

120 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1060.0 FIELD HOCKEY1061.0Year Tier Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25AA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 14: Nov 6-8 11 FallAAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 14: Nov 6-8 11 Fall2025/26AA 26 Week 5: Sep. 2 Week 13: Oct 29-31 11 FallAAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 2 Week 14: Nov 5-7 11 Fall2026/27AA 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 14: Nov. 4-6 11 FallAAA 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 15: Nov. 11-13 11 Fall1062.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules governing BCSS Field Hockey shall be the International Hockey Federation (FIH) with the following modiﬁcations: 1062.1 If, in the opinion of the tournament director and/or umpires, similarity in the colours of the uniforms may lead to confusion, one team will wear pinnies. The umpire will choose this team.1062.2 Teams must be on the ﬁeld of play ready to play (with the required number of players) within ten (10) minutes of game time. Failure to do so will result in forfeiture. Umpires will inform the Tournament Director after ten (10) minutes of game time which team defaulted.1062.3 BCSS Field Hockey games will be played in four (4) 14-minute quarters. Breaks between quarters will be one (1) min with a halftime of ﬁve (5) minutes. 1062.4 A maximum goal difference, that is the number of goals scored by one team minus that of the other team, will be 5 for any game. 1063.0 EQUIPMENT1063.1 Field players may be permitted to wear soft face and head protection throughout a match for medical reasons subject to an appropriate medical certiﬁcate being submitted to the Tournament Director.1063.2 Uniforms will consist of a shirt, skirt, and socks. Uniform shirts must be numbered, a player’s shirt number must be consistent throughout the tournament unless otherwise approved by the Tournament Director.1063.3 Shin guards and mouth guards are mandatory.1063.4 Goalkeepers must wear a shirt of a different colour to both teams1063.5 Each team must have an appointed captain on the pitch or on the team bench at all times during the match; that player must wear a distinctive captain’s band. Should the appointed Captain be suspended or have to leave the match for any reason, an acting captain must be immediately designated and that replacement captain must wear the band.1063.6 Players defending a short corner are encouraged to wear a soft face mask or head protection. The player(s) defending the post during a short corner are required to wear a soft face mask or head protection for the duration of the short corner. The face mask must be smooth, rounded, preferably transparent or single-coloured and ﬁt ﬂush with the face. 1064.0 OFFICIALSAll BCSS Field Hockey Provincials will be ofﬁciated by Field Hockey BC certiﬁed ofﬁcials. Ofﬁcials are prohibited the use VAR, replay or video in evaluating, upholding or reversing an on-ﬁeld decision. Replay and video can be used when reviewing (an) event(s) for the purposes of discipline. 1065.0 PROVINCIALS1065.1 BERTHINGSports that use team registration numbers and berthing ratios to determine provincial championship berths will be calculated by the number of appropriately registered teams at the time of the deadline. Teams that register after the Team Registration Deadline will remain eligible to qualify for a championship berth. Inactive teams (teams that are not actively practicing and competing) will be removed from the berthing ratio calculations. 1065.1.1 The same berthing process is used for the AA and AAA Provincial Championships. 1065.1.1.1 Each BCSS zone that has an eligible team will be awarded a berth.

Page 121

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1211065.1.1.2 Where applicable, the host school will receive a berth.1065.1.1.3 Four (4) At-large berths will be awarded to the zones with the highest berthing ratio of: Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Eligible BerthsTotal Number Schools with Registered TeamsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio1065.1.1.4 Remaining berths will be awarded as wildcard berths to the strongest non-qualifying teams at the discretion of the seeding committee using the historical strength of teams/zones. 1065.1.1.5 If a zone does not have an eligible team, that zone’s berth will become a vacant berth. The vacant berth will be awarded to the next eligible zone as per the percentage established by the at-large berths and will be included in the at-large berth allocation. Should a zone after the awarding of at-large berths, be unable or unwilling to ﬁll a berth, the vacated berth will be included as a wildcard berth.1065.2 TOURNAMENT STRUCTURE1065.2.1 The AA & AAA Provincial Tournaments shall each consist of sixteen (16) teams divided into four equal pools.1065.2.2 At the conclusion of pool play, the top two teams from each pool enter the championship draw while the bottom two teams in each pool will enter the consolation draw as indicated below. 1065.2.3 The seeding for both the AA and AAA Girls Field Hockey Championship will be determined based on the strength and ﬁnal zone placement of the qualifying teams no later than 2 days after the conclusion of the zone championships. The committee will use the following structure when determining the seeding.POOL A POOL B POOL C POOL D1 2 3 46 5 8 711 12 9 1016 15 14 13= Berthing Ratio= Number of Berths/Zone

Page 122

122 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1065.3 TIE BREAK PROCEDURE1065.3.1 If two teams have the same number of points after pool play is completed then:○ The winner of the match played between those teams shall be awarded the higher placing.○ The two teams tied the head-to-head round robin match, then the teams with the higher goal differential (goals for - goals against) throughout round-robin matches shall assume the higher position. ○ If the tied teams have the same goal differential, then the team having the least number of goals against in round robin play shall be awarded the higher position.○ If the teams remain tied, the team with the most wins in round robin play shall be awarded the higher position○ If the teams remain tied, it will be settled by a shoot-out, at a time to be determined by the Tournament Director.If three or more teams have the same number of points at the completion of pool play then the following procedure will be applied in sequential order. If after any step, all tied teams have clear placings, they assume that position and the process is complete. If applying any step of the procedure leads to a breaking of the tie for one, but not all teams, then the team shall be awarded the appropriate placing, and the remaining tied teams shall continue to the next step in the procedure.○ The teams will be awarded placings based on the best goal differential, as deﬁned above, among ONLY THE TIED TEAMS.○ If the teams remain tied, then the team(s) having the least number of goals against among ONLY THE TIED TEAMS shall be awarded the higher position.○ If the teams remain tied, then the team(s) having the most wins among ONLY THE TIED TEAMS, shall be awarded the higher position.○ If the tied teams remain tied, then the team(s) having conceded the least number of goals against in ALL round robin opponents will be awarded the higher position.○ If there still remains equality among more than two teams, then each team will play a shoot-out competition against the other teams in the same sequence of play as per the order of play in the tournament, but with 5 (ﬁve) shoot-out attempts only to be taken compulsorily by each team. A ranking will then be established based upon the results of the shoot-out only, with the award for each play of 3 points to the team having scored or been awarded the highest number of goals, 1 point to each team having scored or been awarded an equal number of goals and 0 points to the team having scored or been awarded the lowest number of goals.1065.4 AWARDS (PER TIER)○ BCSS Blue Provincial Championship Banner○ 18 medals for each of the bronze (3rd), silver (2nd, and gold (1st) ﬁnishing teams○ Fair Play Award to 1 team1066.0 CHAMPIONSHIP FACILITY HOSTING REQUIREMENTS The host is required to have access to a minimum of two (2) regulation size ﬁelds. These ﬁelds do not need to be on a single site but must be relative in proximity to one another. The type of playing surface (synthetic turf vs. water) will be dependent on the facilities available to the school hosting the provincial championship. It is recommended that both ﬁelds in any championship are the same, however, where not possible, and one synthetic and one water ﬁeld are used, every team must play at least one round robin game on both surfaces.

Page 123

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1231070.0 FOOTBALL1071.0 Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum Practices before First GameMaximum Contact Days/WeekMinimum Roster NumberSeason of Play2024/25 15 Week 4: Aug. 28 Week 17: Nov. 30 8 3 19 Fall2025/26 15 Week 4: Aug. 25 Week 17: Nov. 29 8 3 19 Fall2026/27 15 Week 5: Aug. 31 Week 18: Dec. 5 8 3 19 Fall1072.0 RULESThe rules governing BCSS Football shall follow that of the National Federation of State High school Sport Association (NFHS). 1073.0 COACHES CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS1073.1 During games each team must have a person, who is not the Head Coach, on the sideline with a BC Sports Aid Certiﬁcate (Sport Med BC) or greater to deal with injuries. 1073.2 All coaches, coordinators, assistants, teacher-sponsors, student-managers must complete the Concussion Awareness Training Tool (CATT) prior to any team activities. 1073.3 All coaches who instruct tackling must complete the Atavus Safe Tackling certiﬁcation prior to coaching student- athletes in a practice or competition setting.1074.0 MEMBER SCHOOL REQUIREMENTS1074.1 Each member school is responsible for having an Emergency Action Plan (EAP) in place with clearly deﬁned written and practiced protocols. Schools shall work with their administration and district ofﬁcials to ensure its appropriate for their physical setting. 1074.2 Member Schools are required to have students and their parents/guardians sign and return to their school the Concussion Information Sheets prior to practicing each season. The school must maintain these returned forms and be able to produce them if requested.1074.3 Each Member School is responsible for following the manufacturer guidelines for re-certiﬁcation and proper ﬁtting of helmets 1074.4 All coaches and student-athletes registered in STARS on or before the Fall Roster Deadline will be subject to a football mandatory $20/head fee. The fees will be invoiced directly to the school following the Fall Roster Deadline.1074.4.1 Any athletes or coaches who are members of the team but are not registered on STARS will not be allowed to participate in any team drills, games, or practices until they are registered in the BC School Sports STARS database, and have paid the football mandatory participation fee.1075.0 SAFETY PROTOCOLS1075.1 Pre-season/Spring Camp1075.1.1 Programs may not begin open camp/begin practicing until the Monday in August that is exactly 14 days prior to the Labour Day holiday. This 14-day period shall be referred to as Pre-Season.1075.1.2 A member school may choose to run twice-daily practices prior to week 6. However, only one session per day can include full contact. The non-contact practice shall be non-padded (helmets only).1075.1.3 A member school may run practices twice-a-day during the pre-season period. However, only one session per day can include full contact. The non-contact practice shall be non-padded (helmets only).1075.1.4 During pre-season the acclimatization protocols and regulations regarding heat and hydration, as well as the BCSS Air Quality Guidelines, take precedent.1075.1.5 Pre-season practices must begin with two (2) non-padded practices (helmets only). Student-athletes must participate in a minimum of eight (8) practices prior to game competition.1075.1.6 Starting in BCSS Week 5, any student-athlete is limited to no more than 3 practices per week that includes ‘full contact’. Full contact is deﬁned as contact levels 4 (“Thud”) and 5 (“Live”). Full contact is limited to no more than 30 minutes in one day and therefore, limited to 90 minutes per week.

Page 124

124 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookLEVEL 1  AIR LEVEL 2  BAGS LEVEL 3  CONTROL LEVEL 4  THUD LEVEL 5  LIVEPlayers run drills unopposed with no contact.Players run drills against bags or another soft contact surface.Drill is run at an assigned speed until the point of contact. Winner is pre-determined by the coach. Contact is above the waist only and players stay on their feet.Drill is run at assigned speed (including full speed) through the moment of contact, no predetermined winner. Contact remains above the waist; players stay on their feet and a quick whistle ends the drill.Drill is run in game-like conditions. This is the only level where players go to ground.1075.2 In-Season1075.2.1 During in-season play, student-athletes are limited to a maximum of three (3) practices per week, 30 mins a day, 90 mins max a week that include ‘full contact’. Full Contact is deﬁned as contact levels 4 (“Thud”) and 5 (“Live”).1075.2.2 Student-Athletes may not play for a member school Football team and a Club/Community Football team during the fall contact season of play.1075.2.3 Each student-athlete is limited to participating in no more than six (6) quarters per week. A week refers to the 7-day period, running Monday to Sunday, as identiﬁed by the BCSS Calendar. One quarter refers to a player playing both offense and defense during that quarter. A player playing offense or defense only during that quarter would be considered as playing one half of a quarter. One night must pass between games where a player plays both offence and defense.1076.0 OPERATIONS/PROCEDURES1076.1 A regular season forfeiture will result in a $1,000 ﬁne and the loss of a playoff berth in the current school year, unless the forfeiting school can provide an alternative arrangement to the opposing team (i.e. controlled scrimmage, inter-squad practice). A team will not be scheduled in subsequent seasons until the ﬁne is paid in full. In the case of extraordinary circumstances, the forfeiting school can request a review and reconsideration of the ﬁne, in writing, to the BCSS Executive Director, who in consultation with the SAC Chair will review the ﬁne.1076.2 A Coach who is ejected from a game is automatically suspended for the next scheduled game of that team and may receive additional discipline subject to the review of the BCSS Football Discipline Committee.1076.3 Film Exchange: Schools must upload their exhibition and regular season game ﬁlm no later than 3:00 PM of the day following the game. (i.e., 3:00pm Saturday from a Friday game) and make it available to the designated league exchange. Failure to upload ﬁlm to League Exchange on time will result in being locked out of League Exchange for one week. Failure to upload video prior to the deadline twice in one season will result in disqualiﬁcation from post-season play. If failure to upload was due to an extraordinary circumstance, an appeal can be submitted in writing to the BCSS Executive Director, who will review the appeal with the SAC Chair and the Football SAC Hudl Coordinator. Playoffs: Teams that qualify for the playoffs, must ensure their previous ﬁve (5) games are uploaded in the league exchange pool no later than 3:00pm on Sunday of the weekend preceding the week of competition. Teams advancing in the playoffs must ensure their game ﬁlm is uploaded by 3:00 PM the following day. Spotting and Filming Guidelines: Game video must be shot from a minimum height of 12’. Equal or better height for spotting will be afforded to the visiting team for all JV and Varsity games. Teams may need to rent scaffolding or scissor lifts if necessary. Ladders are not permitted.1076.4 A BCSS member school wishing to compete in football is required to submit an application to be reviewed by the BCSS Executive Director and the BCSS Football SAC. The application must include the following:○ Letters of Support from Superintendent and School Principal○ Program Vision, Goals, and Mission Statement○ List of the Coach, Assistant Coaches and Support Personnel○ Financial Plan The deadline to enter a Varsity Program application is December 1st of the preceding school year. The Grade 9/JV application deadline is March 1st of the preceding school year. The school will be subject to a $500.00 New Program Fee. The Head Coach, Athletic Director and Principal will meet with the Executive Director and the BCSS Football SAC who will then accept or defer the new program.1076.5 All student-athletes and coaches must be registered in the BCSS STARS and BCHSFB website prior to the ﬁrst day of competition.

Page 125

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1251076.6 Individual player statistics must be entered weekly, failure to do so will result in student-athletes not being eligible for Conference/Provincial All-Star Recognition. The following statistics are mandatory:○ Defense: • Sacks, Tackles, Interceptions and Fumbles Recovered○ Offense: • Rushing:• Rushes, Rushing Yards, Rushing Touchdowns• Receiving:• Receptions, Receiving Yards, Receiving Touchdowns• Passing:• Touchdowns Thrown, Passes Attempted, Passes Completed, and Interceptions The following statistics are optional, but will assist the committee in assessing players deserving of individual recognition:○ Offense:• Longest Rush• Longest Reception○ Special Teams:• Punts, Longest, Inside 20• Kick Returns, Yards, Longest, Touchdowns• Punt Returns, Yards, Longest, Touchdowns1076.7 In the event of a Natural Disaster/Extreme Weather and travel is deemed unsafe, BCSS will make all efforts to reschedule postponed games, so long that ﬁeld and ofﬁcial availability is possible. Additionally, postponed games cannot have an unreasonable effect on the schedule. If a reasonable postponement is not possible, a regular season game will result in a “No Contest” which will not affect either team’s record. If rescheduling a postponed contest during post-season play is not possible, the higher seed will advance by default to the next round.1076.8 FOOTBALL DISCIPLINE Because BCSS Football is the only sport operated through BCSS at a provincial level, the discipline process is also unique whereas all football-related incidents will be reviewed by the Football Discipline Committee. Notwithstanding, this does not prevent a school, school district, or local athletic association from conducting its process. For this policy, where notiﬁcation is required in writing, an email to the impacted parties is sufﬁcient. 1076.8. 1 COMPLAINT PROCESS Complaints related to unsafe or dangerous play, unsportsmanlike behaviour or conduct inconsistent with the goals, values and expectations of interscholastic athletics, may be submitted by school ofﬁcials, coaches, or game ofﬁcials. No complaints will be accepted to attempt to change or overturn an ofﬁcial's decisions related to the outcome of a play or game. Complaints must be received by the Chair of the Discipline Committee (‘The Chair’), in writing, signed by the complainant who is required to be a Head Coach, Athletic Director or Administrator at a BCSS Member School. After review, the Chair may: a) Summarily dismiss the complaintb) Refer the complaint to another supervisory body such as the relevant school district, school administration or law enforcementc) Conduct an investigation directly or appoint a representative to conduct the investigation The Chair may also initiate an investigation upon the receipt of an Ofﬁcials Report. The Chair will inform the Executive Director of BC School Sports of the complaint and the decision of the Chair relative to the appropriate course of action. Depending on the content of the complaint, BC School Sports may also conduct a Code of Ethics investigation. 1076.8.2 INVESTIGATION AND RULING The committee is permitted to request information from various coaches, team ofﬁcials, school personnel, ofﬁcials, spectators or student-athletes if they feel it will assist in the investigation. The committee is permitted to watch video(s) when evaluating an incident. Member schools and their representatives are expected to participate fully in any investigation as needed.

Page 126

126 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook Upon completion of the investigation, the Committee will render their decision and will inform the Head Coach, Athletic Director, and Principal of the Member School(s), as well as the BCSS Executive Director in writing. The ruling may include sanctions such as the suspension of a student-athlete or coach for portions or all of a game, including multiple games. Any coach ejected from a contest automatically results in a minimum of a 7-day suspension for that coach, which may be further increased at the discretion of the Discipline Committee after review. A suspension of a coach or team ofﬁcial means that the offending individual is prohibited from attending or participating in any team activities, including but not limited to ﬁlm, practice, strength training or other team activity for the duration of that suspension. This also prohibits the offending individual from partaking in any football activities related to another team or different level. A suspension of a student-athlete is speciﬁc to the games, for the duration as noted in a decision from the committee. The student may participate in team activities, with the permission of the coach and member school. 1076.8.3 APPEAL The member school may appeal in writing the decision of the Committee to the BCSS Executive Director. The appeal is subject to a $250 appeal bond, of which $150 will be refunded if the sanction is reduced, and the full $250 returned to the school if the penalty is overturned. The Executive Director, in their sole discretion, may increase the sanction, leave the sanction as assessed by the committee, reduce the sanction, or vacate it entirely. There is no appeal or further challenge to the Executive Director’s decision. 1076.8.4 BCSS FOOTBALL DISCIPLINE COMMITTEE The committee will be made up of 3 representatives as appointed by the BCSS Executive Director. The Chair is also a member of the Football Advisory Committee. One alternate will be named to the Discipline Committee, which can step in should any member of the committee be in a conﬂict of interest, real or perceived. 1076.9 TIE BREAK PROCEDURE If any regular season or playoff game is tied at the conclusion of regulation time. The game will enter a Kansas City Shootout Overtime which will be executed by the game ofﬁcials as the following:○ A coin toss will determine which side shall attempt to score ﬁrst, and which end zone the scores shall be attempted○ Each team will receive one-possession, starting with ﬁrst-and-10 from the 10-yard line on the opponent’s end of the ﬁeld○ The Play Clock will run as normal, there is no game clock, all play is otherwise untimed○ A team’s possession ends when it scores, misses a ﬁeld goal, or turns the ball over (on downs, or by the defense gaining possession)○ If the defense takes possession at any time on an interception or fumble, the play is dead. The defense cannot return a turnover for a score.○ If a touchdown or ﬁeld goal is scored by the offense take the ﬁeld ﬁrst, the defensive team has their chance to match or beat the points gained○ There is no limit to overtime periods, and the process will be repeated until at the end of an equal number of possessions the score is no longer tied○ No extra point is attempted if the winner of the game has been determined1077.0 OFFICIALSAll ofﬁciating at BCSS Football events will be performed by ofﬁcials provided by the BC Football Ofﬁcials Association.1078.0 REGULAR SEASON STRUCTUREFootball will have two tiers for regular season competition: • AAA Tier• AA/AAA Hybrid TierThe Conferences in each tier will be as follows:

Page 127

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 127AAAWEST CENTRAL EASTBELMONT CENTENNIAL G.W. GRAHAMCARSON GRAHAM LORD TWEEDSMUIR KELOWNAHANDSWORTH NEW WESTMINSTER LANGLEYNOTRE DAME ST. THOMAS MORE MT. BOUCHERIESOUTH DELTA SEAQUAM RUTLANDVANCOUVER COLLEGE TERRY FOX W.J. MOUATAA/AAA HYBRIDWEST EAST INTERIOR NORTHMT. DOUGLAS (AA) ROBERT BATEMAN (AA) VERNON COLLEGE HEIGHTSJOHN BARSBY (AA) HOLY CROSS (AA) SOUTH KAMLOOPS NECHAKO VALLEYBALLENAS (AA) EARL MARRIOTT CLARENCE FULTON PRINCE GEORGENANAIMO DISTRICT ABBOTSFORD WESTSYDE SHAS TI KELLY ROADARGYLE (AA) SARDIS SALMON ARM (AAA)WINDSOR (AA) MISSION OKANAGAN MISSION (AAA)WEST VANCOUVER SULLIVAN HEIGHTS PLEASANT VALLEYERIC HAMBER1079.0 POSTSEASON PLAY/PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1079.1 PLAYOFF HOSTING RIGHTS - VARSITY: BC School Sports through the Football SAC will determine playoff draws and ﬁnalize game times and locations. Participating schools will work to provide a mutually agreeable time, date, and location for playoff contests. If they cannot reach a mutually agreeable arrangement, then the participating teams will each request a date, time, and location for the playoff game to the BCSS Football SAC. BCSS and the SAC will take into consideration travel needs, referee, and ﬁeld availability before setting the schedule. Preference will be given to accommodate same day travel, if possible, one-night travel (preferred over two-nights) and a game time that avoids long travel days. Teams travelling a farther distance will be accommodated within reason with earlier game times, when feasible. Hosting schools will be reminded to and are required to book multiple ﬁeld times to allow for ﬂexibility. PLAYOFF HOSTING RIGHTS – JUNIOR VARSITY: Junior Varsity Semi-Final Playoff Games may be hosted by schools in the Interior, North or Island if they are the higher seed. If the two competing teams are not in adjacent zones (i.e. Interior and Island, or North and Island) then the game will be played in a neutral site, approximately in the middle of the two school locations. The BCSS Football SAC will work with respective zone reps to ﬁnd appropriate venues for these playoff games. All playoff games must be played on artiﬁcial turf.1079.2 The ofﬁcial game ball will be the Nike Championship Ball (FB1011).1079.3 Schools that are required to travel for wildcard and playoff games may apply for support through the BCSS Football Travel Grant, no later than February 1 in that academic year.1079.4 All Varsity and Junior Varsity teams from the Northern Region will participate in the AA regular season schedule, regardless of tiering number, and will be eligible for the AA playoffs.1079.5 Only AAA teams are eligible for AAA post season, only AA teams are eligible for AA post-season, except for North Conference teams, which regardless of size will play in the AA playoffs. 1079.5.1 AAA Playoff• Will be a maximum of 16 teams with a minimum of 13 teams, dependent on how many teams meet the playoff requirements.• Each of the three AAA Conferences will receive four (4) berths into the post-season• All conferences will apply tie-break procedure before determining playoff berths• The highest ﬁnishing AAA team, in the each conference of the AA/AAA Hybrid Tier will receive a playoff berth if they ﬁnish in the top two spots in their conference• If fewer than 16 teams have qualiﬁed, 5th place teams in AAA conferences that have 2 league wins in weeks 4-9 (BCSS weeks 8-13) will receive a playoff berth. If more than one 5th place team, meets the criteria, priority will be based on overall conference records in week 4.

Page 128

Page 129

Page 130

130 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1080.0 GOLF1081.0 Year Tier Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersMaximum RosterSeason of Play2024/25 A/AA/AAA 15 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 44: June 2-4 4 5 Spring2025/26 A/AA/AAA 15 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 44: June 1-3 4 5 Spring2026/27 A/AA/AAA 15 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 45: June 7-9 4 5 Spring1082.0 RULESThe rules governing BCSS Golf shall follow those of the Royal Canadian Golf Association (RCGA).1083.0 RULE MODIFICATIONS1083.1 Electronic Devices Competitors are not allowed the use of electronic communication devices during tournament play. Cell phones, smart watches and other communication devices must remain in a student-athlete's golf bag during competitive rounds. Competitors are permitted to use range ﬁnders in competition, provided the slope feature is turned off.1083.2 Motorized Golf Carts No competitors shall be permitted to use motorized golf carts unless with the express permission from the Championship Host Committee and BC School Sports.1083.3 Losing a Player A team may have no fewer than four (4) players, but no more than ﬁve (5). Every team will count their lowest four scores on each day of competition.1083.4 Co-Ed Teams BCSS Golf is a co-ed sport, and schools may have any gender composition on their roster. There are no gender speciﬁc requirements to ﬁeld a BCSS Golf team. Student-athletes who identify as female will play from the designated forward tee markers.1083.5 Caddies are not permitted 1084.0 OFFICIALSAll tournaments will be self-ofﬁciated by players; BCSS may employ tournament ofﬁcials at their discretion1085.0 EQUIPMENTAll schools competing must be identiﬁable by dress – all members from any given school must wear the same colour shirts and if possible, slacks to match. Any competitors wearing shorts must have proper Bermuda style shorts, measuring no more than 3 inches above the knee.1086.0 COMPETITIONS1086.1 EVENTS○ AAA – 22 teams (21 berths plus host school berth)○AA – 16 teams (15 berths plus host school berth)○A – 12 teams (11 berths plus host school berth)1086.2 BERTHINGEach zone will receive one automatic berth to each BCSS Golf Championship. The remaining berths to a BCSS championship are awarded based on:○‘A’ – 12 tournament berths•9 berths for zone champions•1 berth for the host school•2 berths allocated based on the ratio of active golf programs in each BCSS zone, awarded to zones with the highest ratios.○‘AA’ – 16 tournament berths• 9 berths allocated to zone champions• 1 host school berth• 3 berths allocated based on the ratio of active golf programs in each BCSS zone, awarded to zones with the highest ratios.• 3 Berths awarded to non-qualifying teams with the best non-qualifying scores from zone championships, using course rating, slope, and team scores for comparison.

Page 131

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 131○‘AAA’ – 22 tournament berths•9 berths allocated to zone champions•1 host school berth•8 berths allocated based on the ratio of active golf programs in each BCSS zone, awarded to zones with the highest ratios.• 4 berths awarded to teams with the best non-qualifying scores from zone championships, using course rating, slope, and team scores for comparisonIf a zone does not ﬁll their berths, the vacant berth will be reallocated based on strength.A member school may only qualify one team to zone or provincial championships.NUMBERS BASED ALLOCATION FORMULASTRENGTH BERTH ALLOCATION CRITERIAZone Championship:•Slope•Course Rating•Team Score1086.3 STRUCTURE The Championships will consist of a 2 day event, with 18-holes being played each day. The team with the low total score for 36 holes total shall be Provincial Champions.1086.4 FOURSOMES & TEE-TIMES○ No two (2) players representing the same school shall be in the same foursome○ For the ﬁrst round, golfers will be placed according to team placement (eg: Number 1 golfers play together)○ For the 2nd day of the championship, golfers will be placed according to their ﬁrst day team totals with #1 golfers playing with each other etc.○ Whenever possible, Tee times for the 2nd round should be an early morning shot gun start to allow time for travel.○ One coach from each school will be included on the tee sheet on Day 1 of the competition and will tee off in front of or behind their team. Any other coach associated with that team may be accommodated where they can ﬁt into the draw.○ Only student-athletes are allowed to play on the 2nd day of the championship. No Coaches or other guests are permitted to participate without permission of the tournament director or BC School Sports.1086.5 TIE BREAK PROCEDURE○ Ties for the individual and team honours shall be decided by a sudden death play-off at the conclusion of the ﬁnal round.○ In the case of a team play-off, the four (4) scores counted on the ﬁnal day will be the 4 players who go into the play-off. The team with the least number of total strokes on the hole being played shall be declared the winner.○ Ties for second through sixth will be settled using the tie-breaking system of the RCGA, Golf Canada & Golf BC.1087.0 AWARDSGold, Silver and Bronze (6 of each) medals will be awarded to the three teams with the lowest gross score for 36 holes. The top 3 low gross scores per gendered competition will also be awarded. The BCSS Championship Banner will be presented to the team with the lowest gross score for 36 holes.= Berthing RatioTotal Number of Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Eligible Berths= Number of Berths/ZoneTotal Number of Schools with Registered TeamsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio

Page 132

132 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1088.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that most member schools do not have the facilities to host a Golf Championship, and therefore need to book 3rd party facilities to host the championships. The facility chosen as the host location for the championship must abide by the up-to-date Royal Canadian Golf Association minimum standard course guidelines.If your school plans on submitting a bid to host a BCSS Gold Championship and wants clariﬁcation on if your chosen facility has all of the requirements, please reach out to the BCSS ofﬁce for further clariﬁcations.1089.0 BCSS GOLF COURSE ETIQUETTE ○ No advice is to be given to a player during a tournament or championship○ Avoid all communication, verbal and non-verbal which may be construed by others as advice○ Keep your distance from the competitors (approximately 75 yards) while following them during play○ Do not walk on the fairway during tournament/championship rounds○ Players must not distract competitors on the golf courseNon-compliance may result in a two-shot penalty assessed to the competitor receiving advice and/or the removal of the advisor from the golf course.

Page 133

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1331090.0 MOUNTAIN BIKING1091.0Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 42: May 22-23 1 Spring2025/26 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 42: May 21-22 1 Spring2026/27 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 43: May 27-28 1 Spring1092.0 RULESThe rules governing BCSS Mountain Biking shall be that of the rules listed in this document with no rule modiﬁcations. 1093.0 EQUIPMENT1093.1 All team participants are required to wear school colours and be properly attired. School names should be visible in order to help coaches, spectators and others to differentiate between riders.1093.2 Each participant must be clearly identiﬁed with a race number plate, with his/her assigned number, afﬁxed to the handlebars of his or her bike. Race number plates will be provided to coaches and racers prior to their event.1093.3 Each participant is required to wear a helmet. Coaches should ensure that all helmets are in good condition. Helmets must be properly afﬁxed to the rider by a tightened chin strap. Participants may not race with an improperly adjusted or damaged helmet.1094.0 OFFICIALSAll ofﬁcial positions and times will be presented to the racer once their bike crosses the ﬁnish line by the Timing & Scoring Ofﬁcial. Ofﬁcials for the BCSS Mountain Biking Provincial Championship will be chosen by the Championship Host Committee based on their experience in the sport. 1095.0 COMPETITION1095.1 EVENTS The Championship event provides two formats of competition, all competitors must start in both events in order to earn team points. The following events are the ofﬁcial championship disciplines:○ ALLMOUNTAIN XC - is an endurance event on a challenging course including double-track and single- track trails, climbing, descending, traversing and passing opportunities. Race Duration: race organizers seek to develop a race course that challenges riders abilities in the discipline. In order to maintain consistency from year to year, courses are developed with the following intended average completion times:• Senior: 65-75 minutes• Junior: 60 minutes• Bantam: 50 minutes○ ENDURO is a timed event in which the racer’s ﬁnishing position is based on timed downhill stages, typically two to three different stages, combined between untimed transfer sections. The overall time of the racer is not considered, instead only the timed enduro stages are used for determining ﬁnishing order. The length of each stage, the number of stages, and the start format may differ at each Championship event. This is determined by the constraints of each individual course and in the spirit of having as clear and as unimpeded a ﬂow as possible between racers. It is best practice for course ofﬁcials to separate riders by 30 second intervals when enduro stage starting areas become busy and allowing riders to proceed at their own will could impede individual results.1095.2 STRUCTURE The Championship event will consist of timed heats in the All-Mountain event, and timed stages with staggered starts for each participant in the Enduro event. Finishers will be awarded points based on the following criteria:

Page 134

134 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookPlace Points1st 1002nd 753rd 504th 405th 306th 257th 208th 159th 1010th 511th-15th 216th-20th 11095.3 PROTESTS AND DISCREPANCIES1095.3.1 Protests All protests must be reported by. The coach to the Race Director, in writing, within 30 minutes of the race heat ﬁnish. Protests will be investigated by the Race Director as thoroughly as possible and may result in disqualiﬁcations or time adjustments. A school may appeal the protest in writing within 30 minutes of the ruling, appeals will be heard by the Discipline Committee. The Discipline Committee will decide to uphold or retract the ruling put in place by the Race Director.1095.3.2 Discrepancies in Results Discrepancies in placing and scoring are to be reported to the Race Director immediately. The Race Director will consult with the Timing and Scoring Ofﬁcial before making any changes to the results.1095.4 TIE BREAKING PROCEDURE In the event of a tie, the following procedure will be used to determine place:○ TEAM - overall points will be broken by calculating the lowest overall combined time for all of the included (maximum 20 in each division) individuals using the results from each division of the All- Mountain discipline *Note: this must be calculated based on an equal number of competitors on each of the teams in each of the divisions, as it is possible for a team with fewer riders to accumulate an equal number of points. For example, if one team has 10 points earning riders and the other has 9, then the lowest overall combined time must include only the top 9 riders on the 10 rider team.○ INDIVIDUAL - If it is determined that two or more racers ﬁnish a race in a given discipline with the same time (even after considering fractions of a second) and in a medal position (1st - 3rd), then all of the tied riders will receive the appropriate medal for their placing at a later time. Example - three silver medals could be awarded if three racers ﬁnished with the same second place time.○ KING & QUEEN OF THE MOUNTAIN - To break a tie in this category, the lowest cumulative time for the tied riders in both the All-Mountain and Enduro disciplines will be used to determine the winner.1096.0 AWARDSThe following awards will be presented at the conclusion of the Championship event:○ TEAM OVERALL - The BCSS Provincial Championship award will be presented to the school team whose athletes earn the highest total number of points in both the All-Mountain and Enduro disciplines. The overall team winning school will be presented with the BCSS Provincial Championship banner and the BCSS Mountain Biking Commission Championship Cup.○ INDIVIDUAL - Gold, silver and bronze medals will be awarded to athletes who ﬁnish in 1st through 3rd positions in all categories (both boys and girls), and in both All-Mountain and Enduro disciplines○ KING & QUEEN OF THE MOUNTAIN - Individual gold medals will be awarded to the King and to the Queen of the Mountain in the senior division based on the highest total points accumulated by an individual in both the All-Mountain and Enduro disciplines.

Page 135

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1351100.0 RUGBY (XV's & 7's)1101.0 Rugby will have two disciplines within BC School Sports, both contested in the spring season. 15-a-side (XV’s) will be full-sided rugby with 15 players on the ﬁeld of play for each team. 7s will be small-sided rugby with 7 players on the ﬁeld of play for each team.1101.1 FIELDING TEAMS IN BOTH DISCIPLINES A Member School may register teams in either 7s or XVs or both provided that student-athletes are not listed on both rosters nor do they participate in both disciplines in the same academic year. Student-athletes must be registered by the Spring roster deadline (section 832.3). However, a school may change their designated team from XV’s to 7s by the Rugby Declaration date (generally around the 6th week of the season of play, as published by BCSS) without penalty. 1101.1.1 XVS TEAMS MAY PLAY ONE 7S TOURNAMENT XVs teams are permitted to play one 7s tournament prior to the Rugby Declaration date, using only athletes on their XVs roster. If a school has both a XVs and 7s roster, they can not be mixed for the 7s tournament. 1101.1.2 TRANSFER IMPLICATIONS Playing either discipline of rugby is considered to have played interscholastic rugby, meaning transfer rules are fully in effect regardless if the sending or receiving school has XV, 7s or both programs. (i.e. if a student plays 7s and transfers, they are ineligible in either XVs or 7s, unless approved by an Eligibility Ofﬁcer or the EAC in accordance with BCSS policy.) 1102.0 RUGBY (XV's)Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 28-31 20 Spring2025/26 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 27-3020 Spring2026/27 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 2-520 Spring1102.1 RULES The rules governing BCSS Rugby XV's shall follow those of World Rugby with the following modiﬁcations;1102.1.1 GAME DURATION All BCSS rugby games shall be sixty (60) minutes in duration, having two (2) thirty (30) minute halves and a ﬁve (5) minute halftime. 1102.1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS ◦ Matches will implement rolling tactical replacements (rolling subs). This permits a player to when permitted by the ofﬁcials, be substituted off the ﬁeld of play, and then re-enter the game at a later time (again, when permitted by the ofﬁcial). There is no limit on the number of times a player can enter or exit a match, as long as the team has a legal substitution available to them. ◦ The maximum number of substitutions (Counted each as one player on for one player off) is twelve (12) per match. The administration of rolling replacements are the responsibility of the match ofﬁcials and contest administrator. ◦ If during a match, a team has a 40-point or more margin than their opponent, there will be unlimited substitutions for the duration of the match, even if the score differential is reduced below 40 points. ◦ Should a team have used all substitutions and a player from within the ‘tight-ﬁve’ becomes injured they may replace that player. Injuries outside the tight-ﬁve, may not be replaced if no substitutions are remaining. ◦ The table indicates the minimum number of front-row players by squad size and the minimum replacement obligations. For friendlies and league play, coaches from both teams, having taken player welfare into account, may amend the minimum number of front-row players in the squad and the minimum replacement obligations at deﬁned levels of the game.

Page 136

136 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookSQUAD SIZEMINIMUM NUMBER OF FRONT ROW PLAYERS IN THE SQUADMUST BE ABLE TO REPLACE AT THE FIRST TIME OF ASKING15 or fewer 316, 17, or 18 4 Either a prop or a hooker19, 20, 21 or 22 5 Both a prop and a hooker23 6Loose-head prop, tight head prop and hooker ◦ It is a team’s responsibility to ensure that all front-row players and front-row replacements are suitably trained and experienced ◦ Teams may only dress twenty-eight players (28) per match. • Non-Dressed players, may be on the sideline in the appropriate team area, but must either not be in uniform, or have their uniform top fully covered. • Coaches must conﬁrm the 28 rostered players prior to each match with the ofﬁcials1102.1.3 SINBIN The time in the “sin-bin” is 8 minutes not including half-time, or stoppages for injury.1102.1.4 BALL PLACEMENT AFTER TACKLE The use of the “turtle” or “squeeze ball” by a tackled ball carrier is not permitted, ball carriers must not lay face down and push the ball back between their body or legs when placing the ball.1102.1.5 SEASON OF PLAY EXEMPTIONS Schools in the North Central District SSAA, the Northwest Zone SSAA and the two (2) Kootenay SSAA may play senior rugby during the fall season of play, as long as the combined number of weeks in the Fall and the Spring leading up to and including the BCSS provincial championship week does not exceed thirteen (13) weeks of play. 1102.2 EQUIPMENT1102.2.1 Wearing a mouth guard is mandatory. No player will be permitted to participate in a game without one.1102.3 OFFICIALS BCSS Championships will be ofﬁciated by certiﬁed BC Rugby Ofﬁcials. 1102.4 COMPETITIONS1103.1.1 EVENTS The following events will be contested in the BCSS Rugby XV's provincial championships: ○ AA○ AAA○ AAAA1102.5 BERTHING In advance of the Zone Championships, the BCSS staff will convene a berthing committee. The committee will be named by the Executive Director, with support from the Rugby SAC Chair. Every zone will be represented on the committee. The committee will meet to determine the berthing for provincial championships. The berths will be awarded to zones in advance of the zone championships. No half or shared berths will be awarded. The Committee will examine the following metrics when determining berthing:○ Current season results; exhibition, regular season, stadium series etc.○ Number of registered teams in each zone○ Historical strength of zones and teams within the zones.1102.6 STRUCTURE The AA and AAA Championships will each consist of 16 teams split into two tiers of eight (8) teams. Tier one will contest the provincial championship. Tier 2 will contest the Tier 2 championship. Consolation matches will be played in both tiers within the AA and AAA championship. The AAAA Championship will consist of the top 4 teams in the province. They will compete in semiﬁnals as well as gold & bronze medal matches.

Page 137

Page 138

138 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1103.0 RUGBY (7's)Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 28-31 9 Spring2025/26 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 27-30 9 Spring2026/27 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 2-5 9 Spring1103.1 RULES The rules governing BCSS Rugby 7s will follow World Rugby rules Laws of the Game, with the following exceptions: ○ Teams may use up to ten (10) substitutions in any game. ○ Season of Play Exemptions: Due to weather constraints, schools in the Northwest, North Central and Kootenay zones may play rugby in the fall and spring, as long as the combined number of weeks leading up to and including the BCSS provincial championship does not exceed thirteen (13) weeks1103.2 EQUIPMENT1103.2.1 Wearing a mouth guard is mandatory. No player will be permitted to participate in a game without one.1103.3 COMPETITIONS○Rugby 7’s will contest a boys and girls championship and will be a single tier in each gender. • This will be revisited in the future with continued growth in the number of teams participating in Rugby 7s. 1103.4 BERTHING○ Each zone with at least one registered team will receive a berth for their zone champion to qualify for the provincial championship. ○ Remaining at-large berths, including those from zones without registered teams, will be awarded to zones by the Seeding Committee, which will be appointed by the Executive Director, in consultation with the Rugby Advisory Committee Chair. These berths, awarded to zones, will be announced before zone championships commence. BC School Sports will publish these dates during the ﬁrst 2 weeks of the season of play. 1103.5 SEEDING The Seeding Committee will meet once all 16 teams are qualiﬁed, and seed the tournament 1-16, using a basic serpentine draw. 1103.6 STRUCTURE The boys' and girls' Provincial Championships will each consist of sixteen (16) teams. Teams will play in 4 seeded pools, playing 3 round-robin games each, before the top two teams in each pool move on to an 8-team elimination bracket playing down in a single elimination format to crown a winner. Conversely, the bottom two teams in each pool will play in a 9-16 consolation bracket. 1103.7 AWARDS○ Championship banners will be awarded to the winning teams per gendered competition○ 16 gold, 16 silver and 16 bronze medals to the top three teams per gendered competition1104.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that most member schools do not have the facilities to host a BCSS Rugby championship, and therefore need to book 3rd party facilities to host the championships. The facility chosen as the host location for the championship must abide by the up-to-date World Rugby minimum ﬁeld requirements. If your school plans on submitting a bid to host a BCSS Rugby Championship and wants clariﬁcation on if your chosen facility has all of the requirements, please reach out to the BCSS ofﬁce for further clariﬁcation.

Page 139

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1391110.0 SKI & SNOWBOARD1111.0 Year Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionship DateMinimum NumbersMaximumRosterSeason of Play2024/25 15 Week 17: Nov. 25 Week 30: Feb. 24-26 4 6 Winter2025/26 15 Week 17: Nov. 24 Week 30: Feb. 23-25 4 6 Winter2026/27 15 Week 18: Nov. 30 Week 31: Mar. 1-3 4 6 Winter1112.0 RULESThe BCSS championships rules shall be that of Alpine Canada and Canada Snowboard under the Canadian Snowsports Association with the following modiﬁcations: ○ Terrain speciﬁcations and course setting for all events may vary based on race day conditions and the competition ﬁeld strength. ○ Snowboard giant slalom will be run as single rider timed event rather than a dual. ○ Both ski and snowboard terrain giant slalom will be run as a single skier/ rider timed event. 1113.0 OFFICIALS BCSS will ensure the correct timing and ofﬁciating are in place for the championships. 1114.0 COMPETITIONS1114.1 EVENTS1114.1.1 All Ski and snowboard athletes (boys & girls) will participate in a total of 3 runs at the championships. Racers will compete in 2 runs of giant slalom (GS) and 1 run of terrain giant slalom (TGS).1114.2 BERTHING Berths will be allocated. The top 3 ﬁnishers in each event in each zone in each category will qualify for provincial championships (216 individual berths). 1114.3 STRUCTURE The BCSS Ski and Snowboard Provincial Championships will consist of 3 snowboard runs (2 GS, 1 TGS) and 3 skiing runs (2GS, 1 TGS) in both a boys and girls category. Once all runs are complete the top girls, boys, and combined teams with the highest overalls score.1114.4 SEEDING Seeding for the championship will be determined by the appointed seeding committee with collaboration with the BCSS ofﬁce based on zone results converted into points. Points per seed are calculated based on the number of teams that enter into the race. First place = 12 points, second place = 11 points, etc. This structure will be used for both skiing and snowboarding.1115.0 AWARDSIndividual○ Gold, silver, and bronze medals will be awarded to athletes who ﬁnish in 1st through 3rd positions in all categories (both boys and girls) for both ski and snowboard events in GS. Team○ Racers will score points based on their performance compared to the competition ﬁeld. Each schools’ cumulative points will be added up to determine the overall banner winners.○ A full break down of the team points scoring protocol will be provided in the ofﬁcial championships race package. ○ Championship banners will be awarded to the top boys', girls', and combined teams in both ski and snowboard categories (a total of 6 banners). ○ A total of 6 gold, 6 silver, and 6 bronze medals will be presented to the highest-ranking teams across all competition categories: boys', girls', for both ski and snowboard. Racers will score points based on their race performance compared to the competition ﬁeld. These points will be added to determine the overall banner winners. A full break down of the team points scoring protocol will be provided in the ofﬁcial championships package. Six (6) Blue Championship Banners will be awarded to the top boys, girls, and combined teams in both Ski and Snowboard. A total of 6 gold, 6 silver, and 6 bronze medals will be presented to the highest-ranking teams across all competition categories: boys', girls', and combined, for both ski and snowboard. 1116.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that this championship must be hosted at a 3rd party location, a Championship Host Committee will be formed with members of the school sport community to determine a 3rd party venue and planning of the Championships with support from BCSS ofﬁce.

Page 140

140 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1120.0 SOCCER1121.0 BOYSYear TierMax. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25A 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 13: Oct. 30 - Nov. 1 11 FallAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 16: Nov. 18-20 11 FallAAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 16: Nov. 21-23 11 Fall2025/26A 26 Week 5: Sep. 2 Week 13: Oct. 30 - Nov. 1 11 FallAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 2 Week 16: Nov. 17-19 11 FallAAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 2 Week 16: Nov. 20-22 11 Fall2026/27A 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 14: Nov. 4-6 11 FallAA 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 17: Nov. 23-25 11 FallAAA 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 17: Nov. 26-28 11 FallGIRLSYear TierMax. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25A 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 29-31 11 SpringAA 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 28-30 11 SpringAAA 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 29-31 11 Spring2025/26A 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 28-30 11 SpringAA 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 28-30 11 SpringAAA 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 28-30 11 Spring2026/27A 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 3 - 5 11 SpringAA 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 3 - 5 11 SpringAAA 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 3 - 5 11 Spring1122.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules of play for BC School Sports Soccer shall be the Laws of the Game as published by BC Soccer, with the following modiﬁcations:1122.1 All Zone and Provincial matches will consist of two (2) 35-minute halves. 1122.2 Teams are permitted unlimited substitutions.1122.3 Teams may have an unlimited number of players on their team roster but are permitted to dress only 20 players per match. The 20 players in uniform may change from match-to-match. Players or other team personnel who are not included in the 20 must be easily identiﬁed (i.e. street clothing) and are not permitted to wear a team uniform or pinnies while on the bench.1122.3.1 Coaches are responsible for the behaviour of all students and personnel on the bench1122.3.2 Teams must submit the roster for each match on the sheet provided by the Championship Host committee, no less than 30 minutes before the start of each game. 1123.0 EQUIPMENT1123.1 The ofﬁcial game ball of BCSS Soccer will be the Molten F5A5000 Series.1123.2 Uniform Requirements:○ All players must be dressed in matching uniforms. ○ Players’ jerseys must be numbered 1 – 99 with the exception of the goalie.1124.0 OFFICIALSOfﬁcials at BC School Sports Zone and Provincial Championships will be certiﬁed and registered with BC Soccer.

Page 141

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 141Ofﬁcials are prohibited the use VAR, replay or video in evaluating, upholding or reversing an on-ﬁeld decision. Replay and video can be used when reviewing (an) event(s) for the purposes of discipline.1125.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1125.1 BERTHING Berthing for BCSS Provincial Championships will be determined by the following criteria:1125.1.1 Each BCSS zone with an eligible senior team will receive a minimum of one (1) berth to the championship. 1125.1.2 Remaining berths will be allocated based on the percentage of active senior programs in each BCSS zone. If a zone does not ﬁll their berth it will be allocated using the percentage method to the next zone. Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Eligible Berths* If a zone does not have any teams participating that berth will go back into the total number of eligible berths.Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio1125.1.3 A host berth can be allocated, where championships are hosted by a school. In centralized championships, no host berth shall be granted. 1125.1.4 If two or more zones have equal berth allocation calculations competing for remaining berths, then the remaining berths will be awarded to the zone which ﬁnished higher in the previous year’s Championships.1125.2 TOURNAMENT STRUCTURE1125.2.1 The BCSS Provincial Soccer Championships will consist of a 16-team tournament in each of the following tiers, 1125.2.1.1 Girls: A; Girls AA; Girls AAA.1125.2.1.2 Boys A; Boys AA; Boys AAA.1125.2.2 Each championship will involve no more than three (3) days of competition. 1125.2.3 The Championship structure will contest a round robin with four pools with four teams each. With each team playing each of the teams within their pool.1125.2.3.1 ROUND ROBIN POOLSPOOL A POOL B POOL C POOL DA1 B1 C1 D1A2 B2 C2 D2A3 B3 C3 D3A4 B4 C4 D41125.2.4 Teams will be seeded into a Bracket at the conclusion of the round robin, with the ﬁrst-place teams moving to the semi-ﬁnals, the 2nd place teams contesting the 5th-8th spots, 3rd place in each pool playing a bracket for 9th-12th and the fourth place teams in each pool, moving to a bracket to contest the 13th to 16th place spots. 1125.2.4.1 CHAMPIONSHIP DRAW= Berthing Ratio= Number of Berths/Zone

Page 142

142 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1125.2.5 The Championship Draw will be completed in the week following the Team Registration Deadline by a committee. The pool placements will be established prior to any zone competition and therefore will be assigned to zone placements, not speciﬁc teams, and will be based on the following priorities:○ The top two teams from any one zone shall not be in the same pool or on the same side of the championship draw○ Where possible, the committee will avoid putting teams from the same zone in the same pool○ The committee may look at the historical strength of zones when evaluating the seeding○ The committee may explore the relative strength and weaknesses of zones that year for further guidance BOOKINGS, PLAYER CONDUCT AND DISCIPLINE1125.3 Any player receiving 3 yellow cards during either the zone or provincial tournaments (as single events, not combined) must sit out the following game. Additional games may be given at the discretion of the Championship Discipline Committee. 1125.4 Any player receiving a red card is automatically suspended from further participation in the tournament subject to a hearing of the Championship Discipline Committee. 1125.5 Any incidents of player misconduct will be evaluated and ruled on by the Championship Discipline Committee.1125.5.1 Tie-Game Procedures1125.5.1.1 In round robin games, should the score be tied at the conclusion of regulation (and stoppage) time. Each team receives one point and the game is over.1125.5.1.2 Should there be a possibility of a tie in the standings between teams that ﬁnish regulation (and stoppage) time the tied teams will contest a mini game of 5 alternating penalty kicks for each team to determine who shall be awarded the higher position in the pool (if necessary). If tied after 5 shots each, each team will alternate single penalty kicks in a sudden-victory format when there is a winner after each team have had an equal number of attempts.1125.5.2 Tie-Breaking Procedure (Pools)1125.5.2.1 Two Teams Tied: The winner of the pool play match between the two teams tied in points shall be awarded the higher position. If the teams remain tied, the results of the penalty kicks will be used to determine the winner.1125.5.2.2 Three or More Teams Tied This process will be used sequentially, and in its entirety, if needed, to place the teams following round robin play. If a step breaks the tie for some but not all teams, the remaining tied teams

Page 143

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 143will be evaluated on the following step. Throughout these steps, only the games between the tied teams will be used throughout the tie-breaking procedure.Goal DifferentialGoal difference is calculated by subtracting Goals conceded from Goals scored. A maximum of plus-ﬁve (+5) goals shall be awarded for any single match. (Example: a 5 – 0 score (+5 goal difference), a 7 – 1 score (+5 goal difference), a 7 – 3 score (+4 goal difference).If teams remain tied, the team having the fewer number of goals against will be awarded the higher position.If teams remain tied, the results of the penalty kicks, between the tied teams, shall be used.The standings after these three/four mini games shall be ranked. All ﬁve shots are to be taken in each mini game regardless of the score. The total goals scored in the mini game will be used to decide placement. 1125.5.3 ProtestsProtests will be received by the Tournament Director and evaluated by the Championship Discipline Committee.1125.5.3.1 A team wishing to protest must do so within 30 minutes of the completion of the game along with a $250.00 protest fee. In the event that a protest is upheld by the Discipline & Protest Committee, the protest fee shall be refunded. In the event that the protest is denied, the protest fee shall be retained. The grounds for the protest must be submitted in writing from the Head Coach of the team and must be signed off on by the athletic director or an administrator at the school. 1125.5.3.2 The protest must contain the details of the protest, including the rule that was allegedly breached, and the evidence to support that claim. Protests can only be considered on the grounds of misinterpretation of FIFA Laws of the Game, on the eligibility of players, or on breaches of BCSS Policy as listed in the BCSS Handbook. A team may not protest a judgement or discretionary call of an ofﬁcial. 1125.5.3.3 Any team playing an ineligible player shall forfeit the game to its opponents, provided the protest is upheld.1125.5.3.4 A copy of the protest shall be provided to the opposing team as soon as possible after the receipt of the protest. The opposing team shall be provided an opportunity to respond within the time provided by the tournament director, not exceeding one hour. Failure to provide a response in this time may result in the Discipline Committee rendering its decision based solely on the information provided by the protesting team. The Discipline Committee may also review the protest with the game ofﬁcials or others they feel may provide relevant information to the deliberations.1125.5.3.5 Once a decision is rendered, the Tournament Director will provide a verbal ruling to the teams involved. Additionally, the Tournament Director shall provide to all parties, a written ruling which shall include the rationale for the decision and the associations appeal procedures, within ﬁve (5) working days the decision. 1125.5.3.6 Appeals to decisions made by the Discipline Committee are made to the BCSS Executive Director or their designate. There is a $500 fee to appeal a decision made by the Discipline Committee which must be submitted in writing, be submitted by the Head Coach, and signed off on by the Athletic Director or an Administrator at the school. $100 of the fee is non-refundable, $400 shall be refunded upon an overturning of the ruling. The Appeal must state concisely the grounds for the appeal and be received within 3 hours of the decision from the Discipline Committee being received.1125.6 AWARDS BCSS will present the following awards each BCSS Provincial Soccer Championship:○ 21 Gold, 21 Silver, 21 Bronze BCSS Championship Medals ○ BCSS Provincial Champions Banner ○ Boys AA/AAA Clive Hughes Award (Top Goalie)○ Golden Glove - Top Goalie of Tournament (A Boys, A/AA/AAA Girls)○ Golden Boot – Top Goal Scorer of Tournament○ Super 16○ Tournament MVP○ 16 team keeper placing plaques with team photo○ Fair Play Award1126.0 CHAMPIONSHIP FACILITY HOSTING REQUIREMENTS The host is required to have access to four (4) regulation size soccer ﬁelds. These ﬁelds do not need to be on a single site but must be in relative proximity to one another.

Page 144

144 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1130.0 TENNIS1131.0Year Tier Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of Play Championship DateMinimum Games before ChampionshipMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 AA/AAA 24 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 42: May 22-24 26 Spring2025/26 AA/AAA 24 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 42: May 21-23 26 Spring2026/27 AA/AAA 24 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 43: May 27-29 26 Spring1132.0 RULES OF PLAYThe rules governing Tennis shall follow those of Tennis Canada with the following modiﬁcations;1132.1 Calls of “out” and “let” should be made immediately. Any doubt must be resolved in favor of your opponent. 1132.1.1 No Service Lets - If the serve hits the net and goes into the correct service box, the ball will be in play.1132.2 A boys team must consist of a minimum of 6 boys and a girls team must consist of a minimum of 6 girls.1132.3 A minimum ﬁve minute warm-up is allowed before each set.1132.4 Players will spin for service or side, and will change sides after the ﬁrst and every odd game.1132.5 A set is concluded when one player (or doubles team) has won 6 games. 1132.6 ‘No-Ad’ scoring will be used for Round-Robin matches, while ‘Ad-Scoring’ will be used for playoff matches. No-ad scoring means that when the players are tied at deuce in a game, the next point wins the game, but the receiver (receiving team) has the choice of which side they would like to receive the serve.1132.7 A 12-point tie break will be played if a set reaches 5 - 5.1132.8 Prior to the tournament, coaches will submit a roster ranking each player in order by strength. A student-athlete who competes in a singles match can also play doubles. The number one (1) ranked and number two (2) ranked players cannot play on the same doubles team. The Doubles Pairing with the highest players rankings must be designated as Doubles Team A, and the doubles pairing with the next best players rankings must be designated Doubles Team B. If both Doubles Pairings have the same players rankings total, the team with the higher ranked individual will be Doubles Pair A. 1132.9 Coaches will list players for all eleven sets and submit this roster to the scorers table at least 15 minutes prior to the scheduled start time of the match. After the 6th set, either team may make substitutions to their lineup. There is no penalty for substituting players into the ﬁnal ﬁve sets.1132.10 Sets within a match will proceed in the order as listed in 1142.7. 1132.11 Coaches are permitted to coach their team only during an end change, as long as it does not cause a delay in the match (maximum of 1 minute). When coaches wish to coach during an end change, they must call their players to the fence to talk with them.1132.12 During a match, all coaches and players, and their belongings, not involved in the ongoing sets must remain outside the fence surrounding the courts. Only the players involved in the ongoing sets, and any belongings they require, are allowed inside the fence. 1132.13 Following a match it is the responsibility of each coach to sign the site supervisor’s scoresheet signifying the result is correct. In addition, the winning team is responsible for returning all used balls. Results do not become ofﬁcial until all balls are returned.1132.14 In the event of a delay, a maximum of ﬁfteen minutes is allowed before the offending team will be forced to forfeit the match. If team(s) encounter an unforeseen delay, they are expected to contact the tournament director.1132.15 In the event inclement weather, the tournament will be adapted to play at indoor courts where available. At the discretion of the Tournament Director, match format may be shortened. This format sees 7 sets played, instead of 11. (matches will include the ﬁrst 6 games as listed on the scoresheet, and the mixed doubles). The Team winning 4 sets in the shortened format is the winner of the match. In addition, all players would have to be listed on the scoresheet before a shortened match begins. (Please refer to the “BCSS Tennis Inclement Weather Scoresheet.”)

Page 145

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 145 At the discretion of the Tournament Director, other changes may be instituted to accommodate inclement weather. The most common are a change the start times and/or use ‘no-ad scoring’ on Friday and Saturday. Other changes may be necessary depending on the length of delays and access to indoor courts. These changes are at the discretion of the Tournament Director, in conjunction with BCSS Staff.1133.0 EQUIPMENTThe BCSS Provincial Tennis Championships use the Penn Marathon Ball.1134.0 OFFICIALSEach event site will include one (1) site organizer and one (1) site umpire.1135.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1135.1 BERTHING Both the AA and AAA Championships will be divided into separate boys’ and girls’ competitions. Each tournament will consist of 12 boys’ teams and 12 girls’ teams. Schools can qualify both a boys’ team and a girls’ team for participation in the championships. Each zone will be allocated a minimum of one (1) berth and the host school where applicable will receive an automatic berth. The following procedure will be used to determine the allocation of remaining at large berths:Number of Registered SchoolsNon-Assigned Berths at TournamentNumber of Zone RegistrantsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio1135.1.1 Zones receive the whole number of berths closest to their allocation provided that:• Each BCSS zone receives one non-host berth• No zone receives more than 4 berths (not including host school)• This process allocates the appropriate number of total berths1135.1.2 In the event the exact number of berths is not allocated, the decimal component of the zone allocation value is considered to two (2) decimal places. (In the event that the decimal components are equivalent (1.52, 2.52. 3.53) and not all can receive remining berths, preference shall be given in this order• Zones not in the host rotation• Zones least recently awarded “left-over” berths• Zones closest to the host location (thereby reducing travel costs) In the event a BCSS Zone does not have a team, or chooses not to send a team, the above berthing formula will be used to re-assign vacant berths.1135.2 TOURNAMENT STRUCTURE 1135.2.1 The AA & AAA BCSS Tennis Provincial Championships shall each consist of 12 teams per gender competing in a round robin pool play, moving to the ﬁnal or consolation draw based on their round robin placement as indicated below. 1135.2.1.1 The matches will be played in the following order, the ﬁrst team listed is designated as the home team.• Match 1: Singles (A vs A)• Match 2: Singles (B vs B)• Match 3: Doubles (C vs C)• Match 4: Doubles (B vs B)• Match 5: Doubles (A vs A)1135.2.2 The seeding for both the AA and AAA Tennis Provincial Championships will be determined based on strength and ﬁnal zone placement of the qualifying teams as well as historical success at provincials over the last three (3) years. Each coach is asked to rank their team and identify their provincially ranked players. A Seeding committee appointed by BCSS will take into consideration the coaches ranking and the team’s historical strength when seeding the championship.= Berthing Ratio= Zone Allocation

Page 146

146 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1135.2.3 Round Robin Structure POOL A POOL B POOL C POOL D1 2 3 47 5 8 612 11 10 91135.2.4 Championship Draw1135.3 TOURNAMENT STRUCTURE If at the conclusion of round-robin play, teams are tied, the following procedures will be used to determine the higher placed team.1135.3.1 If two teams are tied, their head-to-head record will be used1135.3.2 If more than two teams are tied then the determination will be made following these steps in sequential order. If any one step identiﬁes the winning team, but the next two teams remain tied, the tie break procedure continues at the next sequential step:○ The highest set differential (sets won v. sets lost) during all round robin matches.○ The highest number of sets won during all round robin matches. ○ The highest game differential (games won v. games lost) during all sets of all round robin matches○ The team with the highest number of games won during all round robin matches○ Flip of a coin1136.0 AWARDS (per gendered competition)○ BCSS Blue Provincial Champion Banner ○ 8 Gold, 8 Silver, 8 Bronze Medals provided to the top three teams in each tier○ Every team receives a placement plaque which includes their team photo○ Awards in both tiers to the following:• Top singles• Top doubles team1137.0 CHAMPIONSHIP HOSTING REQUIREMENTS BCSS recognizes that most member schools do not have the facilities to host a BCSS Tennis championship, and therefore need to book 3rd party facilities to host the championships. The facility chosen as the host location for the championship must abide by the up-to-date Tennis Canada minimum court requirements and be able to host at least 16 courts. Host schools may use multiple venues granted they are in close proximity to each other and provide similar playing environments.

Page 147

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1471140.0 TRACK AND FIELD1141.0 Year Discipline Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25Track & Field 15 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 44: Jun 5-7 1 SpringMulti Events 15 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 43: May 30-31 1 Spring2025/26Track & Field 15 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 44: June 4-6 1 SpringMulti Events 15 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 43: May 29-30 1 Spring2026/27Track & Field 15 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 45: June 10-12 1 SpringMulti Events 15 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 44: June 4-5 1 Spring1142.0 RULESThe rules governing BCSS Track and Field shall follow those of World Athletics (formerly IAAF) with the following modiﬁcations;1142.1 Athletes may only compete in individual events at the same level○ A grade 8 cannot compete in the grade 8 shot put and the junior discus○ A grade 10 cannot compete in the junior 100m and in the senior 400m○ Grade 8 athletes are ineligible for junior race walk, discus & hammer throw events; unless they are competing in the junior category in all individual events.1142.2 Relay Rules ○ Athletes may compete in a different relay category from their individual events○ A grade 10 athlete may compete in the junior 100m and the senior 4x100m○ A grade 9 athlete may compete in the junior 400m and the senior 4x400m○ A grade 10 athlete may compete in the junior 4x400m and the senior 4x400m 1142.3 Athletes with Conﬂicting Events: Track events take precedent over ﬁeld events. Athletes must notify the ofﬁcials at all ﬁeld events that are in conﬂict. Athletes in the ﬁeld events will forego their attempt in a round if the round has been completed before they return. GIRLS SHOT PUT HAMMER THROW DISCUS THROW JAVELIN THROWSENIOR 4 kg 4 kg 1 kg 600 gJUNIOR 3 kg 3 kg 1 kg 500 gGRADE 8 3 kg 3 kg 1 kg 500 gBOYS SHOT PUT HAMMER THROW DISCUS THROW JAVELIN THROWSENIOR 6 kg 6 kg 1.75 kg 800 gJUNIOR 5 kg 5 kg 1.5 kg 700 gGRADE 8 4 kg 4 kg 1 kg 600 g1143.0 EQUIPMENT○ Athletes must have a competition bib number to compete○ Competition numbers must be worn on the front for all track events, and front or back for ﬁeld events.○ Athletes must compete in their school uniform. Athletes not in a school uniform will not be allowed to compete○ Relay teams should be in identical uniforms.○ All implements will be supplied by the meet organizers. Athletes may use their own implements providing they meet World Athletics (formerly IAAF) standards. They must be weighed-in and measured at least 45 minutes prior to competition.○ The maximum spike length allowed is 7mm for all events except high jump and javelin. Maximum spike length for high jump and javelin is 9 mm ○ The following equipment/distance speciﬁcations will be used for all Track and Field competitions;

Page 148

148 | 2024-2025 BCSS HandbookHurdle SpeciﬁcationsBoys GirlsGrade 8 100m - 33” (0.84m) 80m – 30” (0.762m)Junior 100m - 36” (0.914m) 80m – 30” (0.762m)Senior 110m - 36” (0.914m) 100m – 33” (0.84m)Grade 8 200m – 30” (0.762m) 200m – 30” (0.762m)Junior 300m - 33” (0.84m) 300m - 30” (0.762m)Senior 400m - 36” (0.914m) 400m – 30” (0.762m)Steeplechase SpeciﬁcationsBoys GirlsJunior 1500m - 30” (0.762m) with water 1500m - 30” (0.762m) with waterSenior 2000m - 33” (0.84m) with water2000m - 30” (0.762m) with water1144.0 OFFICIALS & TIMINGThe BCSS Track and Field Championships will be ofﬁciated by certiﬁed BC Athletics Ofﬁicials and use laser timing for all track events. Protests: Any protest may be ﬁled in writing by the Head Coach of program, within 30 minutes of the posting of ofﬁcial results, to the Competition Secretary and accompanied by a $50 cheque made out to BC School Sports. The protest will be reviewed by the Jury of Appeal. If the protest is upheld then the protest fee will be returned. The Jury of Appeal is comprised of three impartial experienced persons who will review evidence & make a decision. Their decision is ﬁnal. See World Athletics Rule #146.1145.0 COMPETITIONS1145.1 EVENTS 1145.1.1 The following events will be contested in the Grade 8 Invitational competition categories: ○ Heats/Finals: 100m, 200m, 400m, 800m, 80m hurdle (Girls), 100m hurdle (Boys), 200m hurdle○ Timed Finals: 1500m, 3000m, 4x100m, 4x400m○ Field Events: Long jump, Triple Jump, High Jump, Shot Put, Javelin 1145.1.2 The following events will be contested in the Junior Invitational (Grade 9/10): ○ Heats/Finals: 100m, 200m, 400m, 800m, 1500m, 80m hurdle (Girls), 100m hurdle (Boys), 300m hurdle, 4x100m, 4x400m○ Timed Finals: 1500m Steeplechase, 3000m,1500m Racewalk○ Field Events: Javelin, Hammer, Discus, Long jump, Triple Jump, High Jump, Shot Put, Pole Vault 1145.1.3 The following events will be contested in the Senior competition categories: ○ Heats/Finals: 100m, 200m, 400m, 800m, 1500m, 100m hurdle (Girls), 110m hurdle (Boys), 400m hurdle, 4x100m, 4x400m○ Timed Finals: 2000m Steeplechase (Girls), 2000m Steeplechase (Boys), 3000m, 1500m Racewalk○ Field Events: Javelin, Hammer, Discus, Long Jump, Triple Jump, High Jump, Shot Put, Pole Vault 1145.1.4 3000 Metres Qualiﬁcation Standards ◦ Grade 8 – top 24 entries will qualify for the BC High School Gr. 8 Invitational section. ◦ Junior Girls – 14:00 minutes ◦ Junior Boys – 11:00 minutes ◦ Senior Girls – 13:00 minutes ◦ Senior Boys – 10:45 minutes 1145.1.5 Steeplechase Qualiﬁcation Standards ◦ Junior Girls (1500 m) – 6:50 minutes ◦ Junior Boys (1500 m) – 5:45 minutes

Page 149

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 149 ◦ Senior Girls (2000 m) – 9:30 minutes ◦ Senior Boys (2000 m) – 7:45 minutes 1145.1.6 Racewalk Qualiﬁcation Standards ◦ Junior Girls (1500 m) – 11:00 minutes ◦ Junior Boys (1500 m) – 10:15 minutes ◦ Senior Girls (1500 m) – 10:45 minutes ◦ Senior Boys (1500 m) – 9:45 minutes 1145.1.7 VERTICAL STARTING HEIGHTS Starting heights in each vertical discipline will be as follows: HIGH JUMP ◦ Grade 8 Boys – 1.30m ◦ Grade 8 Girls – 1.20m ◦ Junior Boys – 1.40m ◦ Junior Girls – 1.30m ◦ Senior Boys – 1.50m ◦ Senior Girls – 1.35m Bar will increase in 5 cm increments. POLE VAULT ◦ Junior Boys: 1.80m, 1.95m, 2.10m, 2.20m ◦ Junior Girls: 1.50m, 1.65m, 1.80m, 1.90m ◦ Senior Boys: 2.00m, 2.15m, 2.30m, 2.40m ◦ Senior Girls: 1.70m, 1.85m, 2.00m, 2.10m Additional jumps added in 10 cm increments.1145.2 BERTHING Zone representation berthing (number of entries) is based on the numbers-based-allocation formula determined by BC School Sports to ﬁll 30 of the 32 berths to the BCSS Track and Field Provincial Championship and the Junior Invitational. The 2 remaining berths will be open for student-athletes that couldn’t compete in their Zone Championship but would have otherwise qualiﬁed for the Provincial Championship. If those berths are not ﬁlled, they will become open berths to the two highest non-qualifying athletes.1145.3 STRUCTUREThe Championship meet will consist of preliminary and ﬁnal heats in each event. Individual and relay events will include a championship ﬁnal (1-8) and a consolation ﬁnal (9-16).1145.4 SEEDINGHeats will be determined by the meet director and head ofﬁcial in collaboration with the BCSS ofﬁce based on entry times from zone championships.1145.5 SCORINGPoints are scored for individual & relay events based on the following:1st 10 points2nd 8 points3rd 6 points4th 5 points5th 4 points6th 3 points7th 2 points8th 1 point

Page 150

Page 151

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1511150.0 ULTIMATE1151.0 Year Max. Contest Days First Day of Play Championship Date Minimum Numbers Season of Play2024/25 26 Week 30: Feb. 24 Week 42: May 22-23 9 Spring2025/26 26 Week 30: Feb. 23 Week 42: May 22-23 9 Spring2026/27 26 Week 31: Mar. 1 Week 43: May 27-28 9 Spring1152.0 RULES OF PLAY The rules governing BCSS Ultimate shall be those of the USAU 11th Edition Rules with the following modiﬁcations: 1152.1 POINT TARGET - Games have a Point Target of 13. Once a team reaches the Point Target they have won and the game is over. There is no need to win a game by 2 points (i.e. a game that is 13-12 is over).1152.2 CHAMPIONSHIP GAMES - All placement games (eg. 5th place, 16th place) are played under the same rules as other games in the tournament. There are two (2) Championships games (AA & AAA). Championship games have a Point Target of 15.1152.3 HALF TIME - Games will have a “Mirror Half” after the ﬁrst team reaches 7 points. There is a quick break at Half Time (maximum 5 minutes). For the next pull teams will be the opposite (or mirror) of the pull that started the game. (i.e. If Red pulled to Blue from the North End zone at the start of the game, then Blue pulls to Red from the North End zone after Half Time). If no team has reached 7 by 45 min after the scheduled start time of the game, Half Time will happen at the conclusion of the next point. Half time in Championship games will be taken after the ﬁrst team reaches 8 points, or 55 minutes after the scheduled start time of the game.1152.4 HARD CAP - Games will have a Hard Cap 85 minutes after the scheduled start time of the game. Hard Cap will be indicated by an Air Horn, but team Captains should be aware of the time and work with the opposing team to put the Hard Cap into place at the appropriate time. Ofﬁcial time will be that shown by a cell phone and not a wrist watch. After 85 Min, the current point is completed and the team with the most points is the winner. If the game is tied after the current point, one more point will be played. A new point is considered to have started as soon as the previous point has concluded.1152.5 CAPS FOR CHAMPIONSHIP GAMES - Final games will have a Hard Cap 100 minutes after the scheduled start time.1152.6 TIMEOUTS - Teams are given 1 time-out per half + 1 ﬂoater time-out per game. Teams can take a maximum of 2 time-outs per half, and a maximum of 3 time-outs per game. Time-outs should be limited to 90 seconds. No time-outs can be called during a Cap. Note that a Cap is not “on” until the conclusion of the current point. If the Cap is announced during a point, teams may still take a time- out during that point.1152.7 ZONE DEFENCE - Teams may use zone defence.1152.8 FOOTBLOCKS - Foot-blocks are legal.1152.9 GENDER RATIO RULE - At the start of the game, after the ﬁrst disc ﬂip, an additional disc ﬂip happens with the winner selecting the gender ratio for the ﬁrst point. For the second and third points the ratio must be the reverse of the ﬁrst point. For the fourth and ﬁfth points the ratio must be the same as the ﬁrst point. This pattern of alternating the ratio every two points repeats itself until the end of the game (half time has no impact on the pattern).1152.10 GENDER MATCHING PULL RULE - The player pulling the disc at the beginning of each point must be representing the gender which has 4 matching players on the ﬁeld for that point.1152.11 Teams must have a minimum number of nine (9) players on their team. There is no maximum number of players. All players must be registered with BC School Sports and be on the appropriate roster in STARS. Teams must ﬁeld seven (7) players on the ﬁeld at one time and be in accordance with the applicable gender ratio. 1153.0 EQUIPMENT All teams attending Championships must have jerseys/shirts of matching colour and design. Numbered jerseys are permitted but are not required. Numbered jerseys should have numbers on the back and no two players should have the same number. Matching shorts are recommended but not required.1154.0 OFFICIALS All BCSS Ultimate competitions will be self-ofﬁciated by players on the ﬁeld.

Page 152

152 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1155.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIP1155.1 BERTHING Qualiﬁcation for both the AA and AAA tournament will happen at the zone level. Teams who win their Zone Championship will automatically have a spot in Championships (9 teams). The remaining seven (7) spots will be determined using the following berthing formula:Total Number Schools with Registered TeamsTotal Number of Eligible BerthsTotal Number Schools with Registered TeamsTeams/Zone Berthing Ratio1155.2 STRUCTURE BCSS Ultimate AA and AAA Provincial Championships will consist of 16 teams competing in a two (2) day championship tournament. Day one (1) will be a round robin pool play structure, day two (2) will have playouts of the championship and consolation brackets. 1155.3 SEEDING Seeding for the round robin play will be determined by the Championship Host Committee after the provincials’ team registration deadline. The committee will take into consideration standings during league play as well as historical strength to ensure fair seeding for the championship. 1155.3.1 ROUND ROBIN POOLSPOOL A POOL B POOL C POOL D1 2 3 48 7 6 59 10 11 1216 15 14 13 Teams will be seeded into the Championship or Consolation bracket based on their placement in their pool. The top two (2) teams from each pool will go into the championship bracket for day two (2), and the bottom two (2) teams during pool play will go into the consolation bracket for day two (2).1155.4 CHAMPIONSHIP/CONSOLATION BRACKET = # of Berths/Zone= Berthing Ratio

Page 153

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1531155.5 TIE BREAKING PROCEDURE 1155.5.1 Two Way TieIn the case of a tied record between two teams at the conclusion of the round robin; the head to head match up will be used to determine the higher ranking team.1155.5.2 Three Way Tie○ In the case of a tie between 3 teams, the record in the games between those teams will be considered.○ If teams are all 1-1 (a circular tie), point differential will be calculated for the games between the 3 tied teams.○ If this results in a tie, then points scored for each team in these games will be used.○ If this results in a tie then the total point difference for the teams in current pool games will be used.○ If this results in a tie then total point difference for all games played in the tournament will be used.○ If this results in a tie then total points scored for each team in all games in the tournament will be used.○ If this results in a tie then, if reasonable, at the sole discretion of the Tournament Director a game to 3 points will be contested between the remaining tied teams. If in the discretion of the Tournament Director, it is unreasonable to do so, a coin will be ﬂipped to break the remaining tie.Note: The outcomes of the tie breaker will be used to place all teams. If all teams are placed after the ﬁrst tie breaker, then those seedings are used. We will not go back to head to head or previous tie-breakers after this process has begun. Remaining ties will be broken by proceeding through the procedure.1156.0 AWARDS○ AAA BCSS Championship Banner○AA BCSS Championship Banner○ Gold, Silver and Bronze Medals for the top 3 teams in each tier, 30 medals will be provided for each team. Any additional medals can be purchased by the school through BCSS.○ AAA Spirit of the Game Plaque○ AA Spirit of the Game Plaque○ Placement plaques for each team in both tiers.

Page 154

154 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1160.0 VOLLEYBALL1161.0 BOYSYear Tier Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of PlayChampionshipDateMinimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25 A 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 17: Nov. 28-30 6 FallAA/AAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 17: Nov. 27-30  Fall2025/26A 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 17: Nov. 27-29 6 FallAA/AAA 26 Week 5: Sep. 3 Week 17: Nov. 26-29 6 Fall2026/27A 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 18: Dec. 3-5 6 FallAA/AAA 26 Week 6: Sep. 8 Week 18: Dec. 2-5 6 FallGIRLSYear Tier Max. Contest DaysFirst Day of Play Championship Date Minimum NumbersSeason of Play2024/25A/AA/AAA/AAAA26Week 5: Sep. 3Week 17: Nov. 28-30 6 Fall2025/26A/AA/AAA/AAAA26Week 5: Sep. 3Week 17: Nov. 27-29 6 Fall2026/27A/AA/AAA/AAAA26Week 6: Sep. 8Week 18: Dec. 3-5 6 Fall1162.0 RULES OF PLAY1162.1 The rules of play governing BCSS Volleyball shall follow those of Volleyball Canada with the following modiﬁcations:1162.1.1 Teams may have as many players as they wish on their roster however teams may dress a maximum of 15 players per match during zone and provincial championships. The 15 dressed players may change from match-to-match. 1162.1.2 All matches will use the 12-sub unlimited rule and one or two liberos per set.1162.1.3 A team may designate different players as their liberos each set. The liberos do not serve. 1162.1.4 Teams are to switch sides after each set. At the conclusion of volleyball matches, or any side change, both teams are free to immediately begin their post-game handshake, or switch sides as in past practice, and do not need to line up on the baseline.1162.1.5 Teams may play the ball off the ceiling (including overhead obstructions) provided that the contact with the ceiling takes place above the ﬂoor within the court and free zone (head ofﬁcial to conﬁrm free zone designation with host) and the ball does not cross into the opponents playing space immediately after contacting the ceiling or obstruction.1163.0 EQUIPMENT1163.1 The ofﬁcial game ball is the Molten V5M5000 FLISTATEC Series. The colour of the ball is irrelevant. However, when multiple balls are used within a match (3-ball system) all the balls must be of the same colour. For provincial champi-onships, the same colour ball will be used for all matches.1163.2 Uniform Requirements:○ All players except the Libero(s) must be dressed identically, shorts must closely match.○ Players’ jerseys must be numbered 1 - 99.○ The number must be placed on the jersey at the center on the front and on the back.○ The Libero(s) must wear a uniform which has a different dominant colour than that of the team jersey.○ The Libero jersey must clearly contrast with the rest of the team.○ The Libero(s) must have a different number (1-99) from all other players on the team.1164.0 OFFICIALS The 1st ofﬁcial (R1) at all Zone and Provincial Championship matches will be a Volleyball Canada certiﬁed ofﬁcial. Where possible, the 2nd ofﬁcial (R2) should also be a Volleyball Canada certiﬁed ofﬁcial.

Page 155

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1551165.0 PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS1165.1 VOLLEYBALL CHAMPIONSHIPS BERTHING All genders and tiers (16 – team tournaments)○Each of the nine (9) BCSS zones will receive one berth ○One berth is awarded to the host school, if applicable ○3 additional berths will be allocated based on the percentage of active senior programs in each BCSS zone. Total Number Schools with (active) Registered TeamsNumber of available berthsTotal Number Schools with (active) Registered Teams in ZoneBerthing ratio○ Remaining at-large championship berths will be awarded to zones at the discretion of the seeding committee based on the strength of the zone. This committee will meet virtually to decide on the berthing allocation as indicated in the volleyball berthing memo circulated to schools.1165.2 TOURNAMENT STRUCTURE○ All seven volleyball championships will be 16-team tournaments which will feature four (4) power pools of four (4) teams each. At the conclusion of the power pool play, all 16 teams will enter a traditional single-elimination bracket.○ The winners of each power pool will be moved up one spot (i.e., The winner of power pool B (teams 5-8) will be seeded 4th in the elimination bracket) while the last place team in each power pool will drop one seed (i.e., the last place team in power pool B (teams 5-8) will be seeded 9th in the elimination bracket). ○ All matches on the championship side of the draw will be Best 3-of-5. All Placement and Consolation matches will be best 2-of-3. The bronze medal match will be best 2-of-3 in tournaments that are 3-days in length, while the bronze medal match will be best 3-of-5 in tournaments that are 4 days in length. 1165.2.1 VOLLEYBALL – POWER POOLSPOOL A POOL B POOL C POOL D1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16= Number of berths awarded= Berthing ratio

Page 156

Page 157

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 1571170.0 WRESTLING1171.0Year Max. Contest Days First Day of Play Championship Date Minimum Numbers Season of Play2024/25 26 Week 17: Nov. 25 Week 29: Feb. 20-22 1 Winter2025/26 26 Week 17: Nov. 24 Week 29: Feb. 19-21 1 Winter2026/27 26 Week 18: Nov. 30 Week 30: Feb. 25-27 1 Winter1172.0 RULES The rules governing BCSS Wrestling shall be those of the Wrestling Canada Lutte (WCL) U17 Rules with the following modiﬁcations: 1172.1 Matches will consist of two (2) three (3) minute rounds. 1172.2 WEIGHT CLASSES - All weight classes must be used for BCSS provincial and zone championships ○ MALES: (34kg minimum) 38, 41, 45, 48, 51, 54, 57, 60, 63, 66, 70, 74, 78, 84, 90, 110, 110+kg (130kg maximum) ○ FEMALES: (34kg minimum) 40, 43, 47, 51, 54, 57, 60, 64, 69, 75, 90, 90+kg (110kg maximum) A wrestler may compete in one only weight class per style at any given Zone or Provincial Championships. A wrestler may choose to compete in the next higher weight class, except for the heaviest weight class (110+ and 90+ girls), where the wrestler must weigh the minimum weight listed in the rulebook. The decision to change a weight class cannot be made after the wrestler has already weighed in, or qualiﬁed for at Zones and the athlete has ofﬁcially been entered on the weigh-in sheet for a particular weight class. 1172.2.1 Provisional weight classes above 130kg male and 110kg female are eligible when required. Athletes competing in these weight classes must weigh above the maximum weight of the weight class below. The ﬁrst increment will be 150kg male and 120kg female with additional increments in 20kg steps male and 10kg steps female (representing approximately 15% of body weight differential). Provisional weight classes for athletes weighing below the minimum 34kg are eligible when required. The ﬁrst increment would be 34kg male and 34kg female with additional increments in steps no more than 15% of body weight differential. Zones who have athletes in these provisional weight classes at the zone championship, are responsible for notifying BCSS immediately so that the appropriate planning for the championship can be executed.1172.3 WEIGHING  IN  Provincial Championships will have a weigh-in on the day before the competition usually between 4 – 8 pm. The duration of the weigh- in period is two hours (e.g. 4 – 6 pm) integrated with the medical control. Each wrestler is allowed ONE hour to weigh- in, which starts after their ﬁrst ofﬁcial weigh in. If a wrestler does not make weight on the ﬁrst attempt, the referee will record the time of day on the weigh in sheet. A wrestler not making weight on the ﬁrst try is given 1 hour or till the end of the scheduled weigh in period whichever expires ﬁrst. 1172.4 THE MAT - Certain high school leagues allow a 6 meter to 8 meter central wrestling area for their competitions. This size of mat is not used for BCSS Provincial Championships (8 Meters Minimum).1172.5 CALL FOR COMPETITORS - All competitors are required to arrive at the edge of the mat immediately upon being called;○ Competitors will be allowed 3 minutes after being called to arrive at the mat and identify themselves to the ofﬁciating team. Three calls shall be given at 1 minute intervals during this time. ○ If after the expiration of the above time period the athlete has not reported to the ofﬁciating team, then the athlete will lose the match by disqualiﬁcation, but is allowed to continue in the competition. ○ When wrestlers do not appear to the mat, the Mat Ofﬁciating Team is responsible to inform the disqualiﬁed athlete’s Head Coach and the Chair of the Tournament Host Committee.1172.6 INTERRUPTION DUE TO INJURY OR BLOOD - The entire suspension may be accorded at one time or accumulated at various times throughout the bout. In matches when a wrestler is injured/bleeding and requires attention from the First Aid Attendant, the injury time will not start until available medical attendant arrives at the mat. The match will be suspended for 5 minutes for Blood, or 2 minutes for Injury time, before the match is forfeited.1172.7 THE COACH○ The coach must remain seated in the appropriate corner at the edge of the mat during the bout except during the 30-second break between rounds. The coach may leave their seat to tend to an injured or bleeding athlete on the wrestling mat. The Mat Chairperson may ask the coach to approach the chair to obtain or provide speciﬁc clariﬁcation.

Page 158

158 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook○ The coach may encourage the wrestler and give instructions; however, the coach will not indicate points with hands nor attempt to inﬂuence the referee’s judgement by shouting phrases or using signals utilized by ofﬁcials.○ The coach is not allowed to speak to the referee, judge or the other athlete or coach during the match. The coach sitting in the athlete’s corner during the match may however, request an explanation from the mat chairperson, regarding a speciﬁc call, at an appropriate break in the action. If the mat chairperson calls a conference, the coaches shall refrain from approaching the table or attempting to inﬂuence the outcome of the conference.1172.8 PASSIVITY - If no scoring occurs during the 30 second activity time by the wrestler on the 30 second activity clock, the bout will not be stopped and the referee will award and announce the 1 point to the wrestler not stopped on the 30 second activity clock. The wrestler on the activity clock MUST score or the 1 point is awarded. Wrestling will continue uninterrupted. This is consistent with current WCL Rules.1172.9 ILLEGAL AND POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS HOLDS○ Safety of the athletes is paramount, NO supplays (double overhook on the opponent’s arms) or saltos are permitted in any BCSS sanctioned events. The match should be stopped immediately if this tie-up is initiated by one of the wrestlers. ○ Throws to the side with a backwards motion (lateral drop) will be allowed but only if the offensive wrestler executing the throw has their head in front of the defensive wrestler’s shoulder when starting the technique. No back-bending throws are permitted, they are illegal in BCSS wrestling events. ○ CROSS-ANKLE TILTS – Every time there is a new parterre wrestling attack situation where the wrestler may score with one cross-ankle tilt. To score again with a cross-ankle tilt during the same parterre sequence, the attacking wrestler must completely release the cross-ankle and move their shoulders above the opponent’s hips or scores points with the use of a different hold. Any technique which causes direct torque on the legs of the defender shall be considered a cross-ankle tilt. 1173.0 EQUIPMENT Athletes will be able to compete in the following attire at the BCSS Zone and Provincial Championships: ○ A one-piece singlet 60% or more in the colour assigned to them (red or blue) and not a mixture of both. or○ A school colour singlet (more than half in the school’s main/primary school colour), other than red or blue, if the wrestler provides the correctly assigned red or blue ankle strap. or○ In special circumstances identiﬁed by the coach, a tight form ﬁtting long sleeve shirt will be permitted as well as short sleeved shirts combined with close ﬁtting shorts that: a. Meet the aforementioned singlet colour requirements. b. Are free of pockets, zippers or any other elements capable of causing injury or disrupting competition. c. The coach has communicated to the head ofﬁcial and/or head medical ofﬁcial the rationale for the uniform exemption. The following competition attire will not be accepted at the BCSS Zone and Provincial Championships: ○ Singlets or clothing with team insignia other than the school the athlete is registered to. ○ Any attire that poses a risk of injury or disrupting play, such as: Metal clasps, zippers, pockets. ○ Any element that could impede athlete movement. ○ Any attire that is torn, damaged, or too poorly ﬁtting to be reasonably accepted into championship competition, as determined by the ofﬁcial. In the event that a mat ofﬁcial informs an athlete that their attire does not meet the above requirements, the athlete will be provided 5 minutes (3 minute Call of Competitors plus 2 minutes extra to be properly attired/equipped) to rectify or ﬁnd alternative competition attire. 1174.0 OFFICIALS All BCSS Wrestling competitions will be ofﬁciated by certiﬁed BC Wrestling ofﬁcials.1175.0 PROVINCIAL COMPETITION 1175.1 BERTHING Boys and girls must qualify at their respective zone qualiﬁcation tournaments prior to the BCSS Provincial Wrestling Championships. Rosters will be veriﬁed against the BCSS Student-Athlete Registration System (STARS). Any coaches on the side-lines must also be included in the system, including student-managers.1175.2 STRUCTURE ○ At the BCSS Championships, the team points awarded in each weight class shall be proportional to the number of participants in each weight class and shall be weighted in the following manner.

Page 159

2024-25 BCSS Handbook | 159# of Competitors 6+ 5 4 3 2 11st 16 12 9 6 3 12nd 12 9 6 3 13rd 9 6 3 14th 6 3 15th 3 16th 1○ All the top placing wrestlers from each school in a given weight class will be awarded team classiﬁcation points.○ Any weight class involving boys or girls, that has fewer than six participants in the BCSS Championships or Zone Qualiﬁcation tournaments, will not have team points calculated from the top of the team point scale. Instead team points would be counted from the bottom of the scale if there are fewer than six participants, as per above chart. 1175.2.1 In order to qualify for the combined aggregate banner (boys and girls), schools must qualify athletes in both gendered competitions and must score more than 16 points in each gendered competition. 1175.3 SEEDING The BCSS Wrestling Seeding Committee will be responsible for seeding the provincial championship based on the current season results (head-to-head matches), zone championship results (head-to-head matches) and previous BCSS Provincial Wrestling Championship placings. Any BCSS wrestling coach may submit a Seeding Nomination Application to the Seeding Committee. Seeding nominations will be due the Monday (10 days) prior to the BCSS Provincial Wrestling Championship. Seeding will be released the Wednesday (8 days) prior to the Provincial Championship. Seeding Appeal Applications need to be submitted to the Seeding Committee for consideration no later than the Friday (6 days) prior to the BCSS Provincial Wrestling Championships. Seeding appeals should be sent to both the Seeding Coordinator and Zone designate attending the Seeding Appeals meeting. The Final Seeding meeting will occur on Thursday, the ﬁrst day of the Provincial Championship, with changes released as soon as possible. No changes to seeding will be considered once the Final Seeding Meeting has concluded. 1175.3.1 The Seeding Committee will use the following seeding criteria when establishing the seeding for the BCSS Wrestling Provincial Championship. ○ Head to Head matches: must be from ofﬁcial matches refereed by BCSS sanctioned ofﬁcials and only matches from the current BCSS season○ Previous years BCSS Wrestling Provincial Championship Results ○ Other tournament results from the current season will be considered if necessary. ○ If a consensus is not reached, then a majority vote by the Zone Reps will decide seeding. ○ The four top wrestlers in both boys and girls weight classes will be seeded if possible. 1175.4 DRAW Each weight class will have a traditional 32-person draw, with highest seed matched up against the lowest seed. The BCWOA assigned head Pairing Master will adapt the draw for weight classes with less than 32 participants, with the highest seeds obtaining byes where necessary.1175.4.1 Seeds will be randomly placed into each quarter bracket and byes will be placed by a prescribed system. 1175.4.2 Where possible, the pairing master will attempt to prevent regional/school athletes meeting in the ﬁrst two (2) rounds. If necessary, athletes will be moved on a random basis to avoid the regional matchups. 1175.5 TIE BREAKING PROCEDURE As per the WCL Rulebook - If the score at the end of a bout is tied, the wrestler who has the most higher value scoring actions in the following order will be declared the winner. The following criteria, in sequence, will be applied: ○ Most high point moves: 4 points, 2 points, 1 point ○ Least number of cautions ○ Last points scored in the match To provide the opportunity for the student athlete/coach to review a match sequence action, all matches will have mat size video review. The current WCL Challenge process procedure will be used throughout the entire BCSS Wrestling Championship. Note: If a challenge is lost no point will be awarded to the opponent.

Page 160

160 | 2024-2025 BCSS Handbook1175.6 MATCH CHALLENGE PROCESS Each wrestler is entitled to one challenge per bout. If after reviewing the challenge, the refereeing body modiﬁes its decision in favor of the wrestler making the challenge, the wrestler can use an additional challenge during the bout. If the refereeing body or jury of appeal conﬁrms the decision, the wrestler loses the challenge, and no further challenges will be allowed to the challenging wrestler for the remainder of the bout. Where the review results conﬁrm the referee’s ruling on the mat, the non-challenging wrestler, will be awarded one (1) point. 1175.7 WEIGH IN PROCEDURE ○ Athletes require their Weigh-in card & Accreditation pass to weigh in.○ Medical personnel will examine each competitor for any disqualifying medical conditions such as ringworm, staph, or herpes. Before weighing in, athletes must undergo a medical examination. Wrestlers then proceed to the scale area.○ Do not leave clothes or valuables lying around. Carry all belongings to the scale and place them in the basket before stepping on the scales.○ Males and females must weigh-in wearing their competition singlet. Wrestlers will not be accepted at weigh-in wearing altered singlets.○ Fingernails must be cut short and facial hair removed (or full growth) prior to weigh-in.○ Once a wrestler has made weight, make sure the ofﬁcial signs your name off the list.○ If an athlete does not make weight on their ﬁrst attempt, they have one hour to make weight. Athletes must keep their weigh-in card until they make weight.○ Remember that the use of sauna suits or garbage bags is strictly prohibited. Athletes using these artiﬁcial weight loss techniques will be disqualiﬁed from the tournament. Coaches who assist or promote this type of weight loss will be barred from the competition site for the remainder of the championships, with a BCSS discipline hearing to be scheduled if deemed necessary.○ There is a 0.2 kg weight allowance for the BCSS Championships. A wrestler cannot compete in any weight class other than the one they have qualiﬁed for.○ There is only a one day weigh-in.1176.0 AWARDS ○ A BCSS Championship Banner will be awarded to the Top Girls team, Top Boys Team, and Top Combined○ Gold, Silver, and Bronze medals for the top 3 ﬁnishers in each weight class (Boys/Girls)○ Awards for 4th-6th place in each weight class (Boys/Girls) ○ Team awards for top 6 teams in each category (Boys/Girls) ○ Team awards for Top 3 teams aggregate division ○ Most Outstanding Male and Female Wrestler○ Most Outstanding Male and Female Match